The URL can be used to link to this page

31B-193 (9) am Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application ®' 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.7 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution * panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL 16100-22 ... Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. ,,, ELECTRICAL 16100-21 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA ' C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 90o bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. ELECTRICAL 16100-20 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA C. A record of the dynamic test results, both data communication simulation and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) measurements of the individual cable segments. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be •• responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of W other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. .. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. .A B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and OW lighting systems installed under this Contract. ELECTRICAL 16100-19 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. R. Testing and Inspection 1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection. 2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE Specifications. The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the following Specifications when tested from each end. a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence. b. Distance: Less than 90 meters. C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB. d. Near end crosstalk (NEXT) at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.D Db. e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS (18.8 loopback). f. Noise: Less than 100 mv. g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one at TDR, and one at signal injector. h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop, including Outlet 10 and Pass/Fail status. S. System Documentation: 1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. ELECTRICAL 16100-18 MM Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA P. Wiring 1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. a g. Identification. 5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden type 9451, or equivalent, unless otherwise specified. 6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z" tape markers or equivalent. 7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be un-mounted for service and inspection. Acceptance Testing 1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. ELECTRICAL 16100-17 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 1. All equipment racks, housings, and raceways shall be grounded. " 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a .. minimum. M. Labeling 1. Each cable shall be labeled: a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel. b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block. 2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear overwrap to protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are •.� utilized, the clear overwrap shall cover the entire legend. 3. All cables will be labeled at both ends, with room number and floor. N. Field Quality Control 1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible !" for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. O. General Co-ordination (Date and Telephone Wiring) 1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. ■* 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. ** ELECTRICAL 16100-16 No Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3) port faceplates for combined voice/data locations. 5. Voice cable to be Category 5, unshielded twisted pair (UTP). J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and +. industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with 2.13.M, "Labeling" of this section. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated * floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. K. Testing of Data Cables 1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs �. shall be corrected by the Contractor. Open and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the problem is caused by faulty termination. If the termination is proper, the bad pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch down sheets. 2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs, the entire cable shall be replaced at no charge to the Owner. 3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5 cable. L. Grounding ELECTRICAL 16100-15 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College - Northampton, MA I. Data cabling shall be Category 5, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as manufactured by IBM, Belden, or AT&T. 1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications: a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare CU, PVC jacket, 4 pairs. b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ: 4 PF/FT. C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67% d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT. e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R. at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT. f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS +/- 15%. •� 2. Frequency Max. Attenuation Min Crosstalk 1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft. 62 dB/1,000 Ft. .. 4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft. 53 dB/1,000 Ft. 10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft. 47 dB/1,000 Ft. 16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft. 44 dB/1,000 Ft. 20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft. 42 dB/1,000 Ft. 100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft. 32 dB/1,000 Ft. 3. Physical Characteristics a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs. b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in. C. Nominal diameter: .217 in. d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal. 4. Wall Plates and Connectors a. Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as manufactured by Hubbell. I.. Data - Category 5 5110 Series. 2. Voice - FTJ Type b. Data runs will be punched down (8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch panels using EIA/TIA 568B standard. • C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks. ELECTRICAL 16100-14 w Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 2.9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor) A. The Fire Alarm System is existing to remain, Simplex 4002 System. B. The Electrical Contractor shall install new initiating and indicating devices as shown on Plans. All devices shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be as manufactured by Simples to ensure compatibility. ,. C. The Owner shall provide any fire alarm control panel modules required for expanding existing system to accept new devices. These modules shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. D. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. E. The building shall be wired on a "zone per floor" basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. "* 2.10 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. C. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and (1) for future expansion. D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run from each outlet location to the Telephone Room. ., G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks. ELECTRICAL 16100-13 ow Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproofl is required. Enclosures shall have 1W gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC. 5. Fuses shall be as required. 6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA .� 3R enclosure. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or .� double pole toggle switches as specified, or required. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. „ 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable •• without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be allowed. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand- Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No substitutions will be allowed. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter - for use by others for interlocking purposes. ELECTRICAL 16100-12 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching screws. To be Leviton Cat. No. 86000 series, or equal. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. *! All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. *■ C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect and Owner. 2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off' position. ELECTRICAL 16100-11 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College - Northampton, MA �" A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 5352-I, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20-3-5-0, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 5362-IG, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-2, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1223-2, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1224-2, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red .A handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-PLR, or equal. 9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration A shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. *• No. 278. 10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex, style as chosen by Architect. ELECTRICAL 16100-10 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: 1. structural conditions. 2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws, bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. ! " I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. ,�. 2.5 NAMEPLATES ELECTRICAL 16100-9 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College -- Northampton, MA PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all .. raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions, raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type. C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. ELECTRICAL 16100-8 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition ** Smith College Northampton, MA A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. 4" C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be ± , the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do WA all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the �. Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. *■ 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. ELECTRICAL 16100-7 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS "® A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment *0 installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. WM C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. . + 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart, if applicable. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE ELECTRICAL 16100-6 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA .. A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS * A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Contractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. 16100-5 �, ELECTRICAL Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, .. without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the .. Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for .. which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. ✓ 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER ELECTRICAL 16100-4 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of *� pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered .� for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS „� ELECTRICAL 16100-3 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College .. Northampton, MA A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract " requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were aw present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. ELECTRICAL 16100-2 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for ** and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. +w 2. Feeders. 3. Telephone/Data System 4. Fire Alarm System. 5. Wiring devices and plates. 6. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. 7. Arrange for inspections and perform tests. 8. Guarantee and instructions. 9. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as designated by the Owner. 10.All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in �., operation, and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS „ , ELECTRICAL 16100-1 ws Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition . , Smith College Northampton, MA asr B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.11 ALTERNATE BID ITEMS w. A. Refer to Division 1 for description of Alternate Bid Items. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL 15600 -37 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College „ Northampton, MA C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.9 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. .� C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The ..� engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.10 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural w Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. MECHANICAL 15600 -36 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA w A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the ws Owner. 3.6 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the go fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the MECHANICAL Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.8 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. �o MECHANICAL 15600 -35 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College .. Northampton, MA D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, ..� examine piping,joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. .R E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.4 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating &Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. • The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. .R D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system. 3.5 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS MECHANICAL 15600 -34 �, Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The MECHANICAL Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re- filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. I. Pumped Discharge Piping 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". All openings of the system shall be protected by a 2" # (min.) water seal and vent piping installed to allow a maximum internal pressure fluctuation of+/- 1" of water column. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45° wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or l/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall u provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water w and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently ++� calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield go strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. MECHANICAL 15600 -33 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and ., walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in +■* a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be w necessary, the MECHANICAL Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall .. be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers �* as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum •" headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system ` from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out �* piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. MECHANICAL 15600 -32 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system w components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: aM 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. w PART 3 - INSTAL. .ATION 3.1 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the MECHANICAL Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the MECHANICAL Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the MECHANICAL Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense. MECHANICAL 15600 -31 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College **� Northampton, MA 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for MECHANICAL equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate I/O ••s points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. 1. Panel Radiators and Convectors a. Each heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close. 2. Hoistway motorized damper a. Motorized damper shall be power closed/spring open wired to a reverse acting thermostat mounted in the hoistway space rises above 90 deg F. Power to damper thermostat and interconnections to the fire alarm system will be done by the Electrical Contractor. I. Adjustment and Calibration: ..0 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for .� functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. MECHANICAL 15600 -30 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms W e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated G. Systems Software The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors, which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be W updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. MECHANICAL 15600 -29 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of 20% to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million *+a operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA-1 C. �*! k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. 1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV 10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network MECHANICAL 15600 -28 O Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy of +1°F. Kele Precon +� Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of - W 52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of + 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-10K-2- RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75°F over the range of their application. on b. Pressure Instruments W 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy W shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-272-2-XX-B-1-2-2. Aw 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. on Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. MECHANICAL 15600 -27 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space *� temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database w� and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal .. binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. w. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. 3. Terminal Control Devices - T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or w normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local .� override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control w. MECHANICAL 15600 -26 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1. Global Network Controller - LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network (CMnet) and the Global Network (Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a g building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules -T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal MECHANICAL units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. MECHANICAL 15600 -25 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. S. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. wA Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. MECHANICAL 15600 -24 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College -_ Northampton, MA 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The r system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings, and one (1) CADD disk of these Drawings. go 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide I/O Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the go equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure on MECHANICAL 15600 -23 No Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College , Northampton, MA 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have ..a "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all MECHANICAL work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. war 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall .. have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in I/O Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in I/O Summary Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. C. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in I/O Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. MECHANICAL 15600 -22 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition "■ Smith College Northampton, MA A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal" (12" x 12"). 2.17 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements u. 1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20, and shall be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant. It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing master central site software library, located at the MECHANICAL Department Building. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software programs. 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices aw manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize ` electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing system. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described iw under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. MECHANICAL 15600 -21 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; w� raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.14 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2- ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. .� C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. w� Metraflex Co. 2.15 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 prig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.16 ACCESS PANELS MECHANICAL 15600 -20 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or"Threadolets", or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 4 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation , s requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. MECHANICAL 15600 -19 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA b Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. 2.13 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. "0A 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. ! 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site .• welding of piping work. B. Application 1. Hot Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. All pump discharge piping lines 2" and larger in accessible areas shall be cast iron "no-hub," ASA group 022 pipe and fittings joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "MG" coupling or "Clamp-All"; on pipe sizes 3" .� and larger use four (4) band clamps, two (2) band clamps will only be allowed on 2" pipe. All pump discharge lines shall be service weight cast iron pipe with all fittings carefully fitted and caulked together with oakum and lead, sealed gas and water tight. Minimum size of piping below ground shall be 2". Where it is impractical to install cast iron pipe, as in tight partition work or where the sizes of lines are smaller than 2", Type "L" .. copper tubing shall be used conforming to ASTM Specification with sweat type fitting using lead free solder and non-corrosive flux, "Non-Korrode", or approved equal conforming to ASTM Specification B 32 alloy 50A. In lieu of oakum and lead joints, "push-on type" resilient gasket fittings may be used on buried pipe only. C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A 106 or A 120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. Mw. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. MECHANICAL 15600 -18 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 2.12 INSULATION A. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal. W 7. All hot water, supply and return piping shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All W refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover, thickness to be as listed below. G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: 1. Hot Water/Supply and Return: a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. MECHANICAL 15600 -17 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College „ Northampton, MA A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt e.s circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent 'piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.10 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed "• pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. .�e 2.11 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical .A runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121 C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. MECHANICAL 15600 -16 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA �w I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour &Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and go plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled 'Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. OR 2.7 PLUMBING VALVES A. Valves shall be manufactured by Fairbanks, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, Hammond, Crane, Powell, or Stockham. (Federal Specifications: WW-V-54c, Class A, Type 1). 1. Gate: 125 lb. WSP, all bronze, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, one piece wedge, designed to permit repacking under pressure, Lunkenheimer Cat. No. 2133, or equal. 2. Check: 125 lb. WSP, all bronze horizontal swing type, screwed caps, bronze go disc designed to permit regrinding of seat without removal of body, Lunkenheimer Cat. No. 2145, or equal. B. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Valves up to 3" shall be Class 125, solder ends, bronze body, op swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 4" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. 2.8 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP PUMP A. Furnish and install, Weil Pump Model No. 1405. Pump shall be rated for 20 gpm at 25 feet TDH. B. Pump motor shall be 1/3 hp, 60 hz, 120 volt, single phase, 1750 rpm and of an air filled design. Motor shall be housed in a watertight cast iron shell with extended cooling fins. C. To be complete with power cord and differential float switch. d. Furnish and install pump with Fiberbasin 18" diameter by 18" deep. P• 2.9 UNIONS MECHANICAL 15600 -15 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end .W pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non- shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type. "" C. Solder end valves are as follows: owl 1. Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931. 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6-HI2. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. MECHANICAL 15600 -14 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners with vandalproof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units 36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be Aw selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. F. Convector - Type RFG-A: Type RFG-A convectors shall be constructed from not less than No. 14 gauge CRS wrap around fronts and No. 16 gauge CRS recessed liner. Depth of cabinets front from wall shall be 1/2 in. Front shall be well rounded on all edges and shall extend back to wall and fasten to flanges on liner with vandalproof screws. Front shall be provided with venetian type air outlet grille. Type RFG-A convectors shall be four-side overlap for mounting above floor with inlet and outlet grilles. G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakage nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. When the ribbed knob is reversed, the clutch shall again engage and close or open the damper bald. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast trunnion and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with two access doors. Access doors ew shall be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head operator. I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extending from heating element to air outlet louvers. 2.6 HEATING VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. MECHANICAL 15600 -13 am Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA B. Radiators are to be manufactured of cold rolled low carbon steel, fully welded and ,.. consisting of header pipes at each end, connected by flat oval water tubes. Tube thickness shall be .048" wall thickness. Header pipes are square .109" minimum wall thickness and include all necessary supply, return, and air vent connections. Provide internal baffling as required. Radiators shall be rated for 56-psi working .s pressure. C. Radiator expansion shall not exceed .016" per lineal foot at 215 deg. F: Radiators are phosphatised and primed with flat white baked enamel. Radiators shall be finish painted with a glass baked enamel for a total paint thickness of 2 to 3 mils and colors shall be selected from factory standard or optional colors. D. The wall panel radiators shall be provided with wall mounting accessories including all clips brackets and bolts required for a factory recommended installation. Notify the general contractor of any requirements for blocking or bracing required for this installation. Piping connections shall be determined from the contact drawings. This application shall include same-end-series pipe connections. Provide all necessary trim pieces including inside and outside corner trim and wall trim. Trim pieces shall be installed to provide a wall-to-wall appearance and must ,. conceal any valves or piping. E. Panel radiators shall be Runtal Radiator Model Rf-3 rated at 623 Btuh/ft at 160 degrees average water temperature. Panel shall be 85/8" high mounted four (4) inches above finished floor height. (Verify with Architect). 2.4 FINNED RADIATION A. Furnish and install finned tube radiators as shown on Drawings. Radiator assemblies shall be I=B=R rated, Sterling, Vulcan, or equal. .� B. Type "A" shall be Vulcan style DS with Element S-4 1/4" square steel fins, .032 thick, 40 per foot, 1" iron pipe element, two tier element, rated at 880 Btuh per foot at 170 deg. F. AWT with ball bearing hanger bracket with cradle. 2.5 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the fully-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS 140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel .. element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. MECHANICAL 15600 -12 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition �• Smith College Northampton, MA P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. aw R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS .s, A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). wu Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the �. ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop !*' Drawings. 2.3 PANEL RADIATORS A. Panel radiators shall be Runtal Radiators or approved equal to those specified in the following paragraphs. MECHANICAL 15600 -11 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct .R width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type w fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1" x l/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6" centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior , to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal '" screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. .r. O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA- 90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. MECHANICAL 15600 -10 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. W D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the MECHANICAL Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members Aes and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the !*� supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. ON F. Duct sections l'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the MECHANICAL Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1- 1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". Elevator ventilation ducts shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel. H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12 on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. MECHANICAL 15600 -9 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon w completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. ■ 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or .� drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the MECHANICAL Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other " divisions shall be the responsibility of the MECHANICAL Contractor failing to co- ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required w. for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. w„ D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the MECHANICAL Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK dW MECHANICAL 15600 -8 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. we 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. �s 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control' paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during ' construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the MECHANICAL Contractor. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. MECHANICAL 15600 -7 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 1.14 GUARANTEE A. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are ..F found to be defective during this period. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building .. caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. w� 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper . . Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. . 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. w. MECHANICAL 15600 -6 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA C. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full w comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The MECHANICAL Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work .� efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The MECHANICAL Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. W 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the MECHANICAL Contractor. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor on to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be go removed by the MECHANICAL Contractor. 1.13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. _y MECHANICAL 15600 -5 ow Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Im Northampton, MA 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the MECHANICAL Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's MECHANICAL Department for review and approval. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the MECHANICAL Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS .. A. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees .. and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS .� A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These , documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. .A B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. MECHANICAL 15600 -4 �„ Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. Mw F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. J. Before submitting his bid, the MECHANICAL Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the MECHANICAL Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air W handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves, Tunstall steam traps. us B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for, each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. MECHANICAL 15600 -3 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 11. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating , ventilating, and plumbing systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the + Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, �w rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the MECHANICAL Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or �. Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred , by the MECHANICAL Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the MECHANICAL Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all .• information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The MECHANICAL Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the MECHANICAL Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. - wr MECHANICAL 15600 -2 .■ OR Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 15600 - MECHANICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 40 A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all MECHANICAL work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1. Convectors, radiators. 2. Piping systems for hot water heating , supply and return, pump discharge piping, valves and specialties. 3. Duct systems for exhaust and ventilation, including motorized dampers. 4. Sump pump 5. Insulation for piping. 6. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control $a work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. 7. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College." 8. Guarantee. 9. Instructions. 10. Record Drawings. 15600 -1 MECHANICAL Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. 3.6 ALTERNATE BID ITEMS w A. Refer to Division 1 for description of Alternate Bid Items. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -23 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College ,w Northampton, MA 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION Wo A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined �+► with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. , G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. .. J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. ••R FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -22 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA *' C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING ■. A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: w. 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation �w 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes an perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -21 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Corp., Model "M" .w standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165oF or as required by the insurance underwriter. b. "Concealed sprinkler heads pendant shall be Reliable Model No. G4FR. c. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "M" chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165oF unless otherwise noted; to be " installed in all occupied spaces. d. Head guards shall be equal to Reliable Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "E" with white finish, temperature 165oF unless noted otherwise f. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Reliable Model H-1, 1" �» NPT, 165oF. PART 3 - EXECUTION .. 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, .m lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. • FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -20 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IR1154 Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. F. Fire Protection Specialties FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -19 MP Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be sup- ported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion �► loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads ,, equally on attachments. E. Valves 1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by .� Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -18 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attach- ments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with " MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner & Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. „ , FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -17 ■R Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete �. and other materials from entering sleeves. d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: ., Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co. .� Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, .. and is flush with adjoining surface. D. Supports, Anchors, and Seals 1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 .. and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4". �. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -16 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -15 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, .. suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry .. practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalign- ment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -14 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA ., (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an electrometric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000-psi. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -13 ow Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade ... sheet glass. e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect. f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system .� listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished ceiling. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B 16.4, or flanged, ANSI B 16.1. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger) (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -12 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360o around pipe at each location, fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1-1/8" sq. brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on W tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flagsil, in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1- d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -11 go Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College am Northampton, MA 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the ., positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and , positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pi- lasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof s. plans, and details. 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract, which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc. Brady (W. H.) Co., Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A 13.1. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -10 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. ,w B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades 1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable * ! scale, not less than 1/4" = P-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -9 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the co- ver: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents ., with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. �* 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation .. and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcon- tractors as well as the local representative for each item of equip- .s ment. 1.16 GUARANTEE .,■ A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -8 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. w� B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish W conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Sub- contractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic ceilings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. " 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -7 WV Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings .� thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes, which may be required. 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Spec- ifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor. 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees + required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of ..,, the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out ap- paratus as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -6 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected +?* by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.7 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial re- lationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -5 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superinten- dent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such infor- mation. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated .� on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum re- quirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -4 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the require- ments of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -3 ww Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA contractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection .. Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and .. with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head con- figuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Under- writer approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria. .� Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -2 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition Smith College Northampton, MA .� SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady prog- ress of all work under the Contract. ' ! 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Renovations to the existing dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system. 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 3. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. 4. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO Box 5010, Hartford Ct. (Attn: Mr. David M. Goush) for review and approval. B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: 1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Sub- FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 ow Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and other procedures to protect .W elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. END OF SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA F. Install piping above the floor,where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cement fittings. G. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. H. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills an frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. I. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch(6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. J. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. on 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. on 3.5 PROTECTION No A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage. on 1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or ON replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts an supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 -9 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA op d. Frames: Satin stainless steel. e. Doors: Satin stainless steel. f. Sills: Aluminum. .o 9. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. 10. Additional Requirements: As follows: w a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with satin stainless-steel frame. b. Provide protective blanket hooks in all four cars and two complete sets of full-height aw blankets. ■m PART 3 - EXECUTION No 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation so tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions, and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. an 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance. .R 3.2 INSTALLATION am A. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in each elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinders; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." go 1. Provide well casings as necessary to retain walls of well hole. B. Install cylinders in protective casings within well hole or casing. Before installing protective an casing, remove water and debris from well hole or casing and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of well casing. ow C. Install cylinders plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches 000 mm) of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. ,n., I). Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, ,go inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. l:. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. 14YDRAI JLIC ELEVATORS 14240-8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA in A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from stainless steel. 3. Sills: Extruded aluminum,with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. *■! 2.8 PASSENGER ELEVATORS A. Elevator Data 1. Type: Under-the-car single cylinder. 2. Rated Load: 2500 lb(1135 kg). 3. Rated Speed: Not less than 75 fpm(0.30 m/s). 4. Power Requirements: Provide components that do not exceed the following load requirements: a. 208V-3 phase b. 190 Max.Starting Amperes C. 82 Max. Running Amps 5. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation. 6. Auxiliary Operations: a. Standby powered lowering. b. Independent service. 7. Car Enclosures: As follows: a. Inside Width: 80 inches (2032 mm). b. Inside Depth: 54 inches(1320 mm). C. Inside Height: 94 inches(2388 mm). d. Front Walls: Enameled steel with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Reveals: Enameled steel. h. Door Faces (Interior): Enameled steel. L Door Sills: Aluminum. j. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling. k. Handrails: Satin stainless steel, at side and rear walls. 1. Floor prepared to receive walk-off mat (specified in Division 12 Section "Entrance Mats"). 8. Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Width: 42 inches (1067 mm). b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm). C. Type: Single-speed center opening. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 .� Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise indicated. .� Mount at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor. 3. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. .� Signals sound once for up and twice for down. G. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated-signal type or digital-display type, located above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators. H. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations with text and graphics according to ASME A17.1,Appendix H. 2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Door Edge Device: Provide retractable edge shoes on elevator entrance doors that cause doors to stop and reopen upon contacting an obstruction. Include photoelectric device with timed cutout that projects dual-light beams across car entrance at 5- and 29-inch (127- and 737-mm) heights; the beams, when interrupted, cause doors to stop and reopen. 1. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. 2.6 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard enameled-steel car enclosures with removable wall panels, suspended ceiling, trim, accessories, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), lighting, and ventilation. 1. Floor finish is specified in another Section. 2. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire- retardant-treated particleboard with plastic-laminate panel backing complying with NEMA LD 3, Type BKV and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 5. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from stainless steel. 6. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)thick. 7. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 8. Handrails: Manufacturers standard handrails, of metal indicated. 2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-6 W Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ON Northampton, MA B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated. W 1. Standby Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars are lowered to the lowest floor, open their doors, and shut down. 2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators with hall-call and car- call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic. B. Car Control Stations: Provide fully recessed car control stations with applied metal faceplates. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated. W 1. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for specified car operation. 2. Mark buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A 17.1. 3. Mount controls at heights complying with applicable codes and regulations. W C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. D. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide illuminated-signal type, digital-display type, or segmented type, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Provide units with direction-indicating buttons; two buttons at intermediate landings; one button at terminal landings. on F. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no w� load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following: 1. Pump, with fan-cooled squirrel-cage induction motor, mounted on top of oil tank with .a vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with f- inch-(25-mm-)thick, glass-fiber insulation board. 2. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with solid-state starting or variable-voltage variable-frequency motor control. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit. D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. I. Provide dielectric couplings at plunger/cylinder units. 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785 joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section. F. Protective Cylinder Casings: PVC pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch(25-mm)clearance from cylinder, and extending above pit floor. G. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. I1. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated: L Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666,Type 304,with No. 4,directional satin finish. 2. Enameled-Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGP for postformed applications and Type HGS for flat applications; color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of products. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. Passenger Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each .� elevator or group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. 1. Single Elevator: Provide "selective collective automatic operation" as defined in .. ASMEAIT1. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. ew 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. as 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Two hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydraulic elevators by one of the following: 1. Montgomery KONE Inc. 2. Otis Elevator Co. 3. Schindler Elevator Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 aw Smith College Northampton, MA am A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each .� landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Samples: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3-inch- w. (75-mm-) square samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. E. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. .R F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable provisions in ASME Al7.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators." 1. Seismic Risk Zone: Project is located in Zone 0 or 1. C. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)" and 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to w Project site in time for installation. MP HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 �e Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 14240-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS W A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for excavation to accommodate plunger-cylinder assembly. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry. O 4. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Structural-steel shapes for subsills and hoisting beams. b. Pit ladders. 5. Division 12 Section"Entrance Mats" for finish flooring in elevator cars. 6. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 7. Division 16 Section"Premises Telephone Wiring" for telephone service to elevators. uw 8. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect switches at machine room door and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. on 1.4 SUBMITTALS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 1 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA o. A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including metals and metal finishes - indicated or specified. Provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards as follows: or 1. Style: Boston Collection 2. Pattern: Kenmore am 3. Color: Cranberry B. Carpet-Type Mats: Heavy denier nylon carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch- (3- to 6-mm-) thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch (9.5 or 11 mm) thick with nonraveling edges. .. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, affecting installation of floor mats. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,P 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. B. Comply with Division 9 requirements for direct-glue applications for carpet. 1. Provide materials for installation by elevator supplier for mats in elevator cab. END OF SECTION 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 12484-FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. on 1.2 SUMMARY .M A. This Section includes the following: 1. Carpet-type mats. "o 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, construction in details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of floor mat and frame specified. B. Samples for Verification: One sample for each type of floor mat indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For cleaning and maintaining floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. on 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS !®w 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Carpet-Type Mats: a. Mats Incorporated. 2.2 FLOOR MATS FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 MR Smith College Northampton, MA F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a rw, heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. ■W G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. am 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING .e• A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss .s Of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. ■M END OF SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions W for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss. 2. Color: White. PART 3 - EXECUTION go 3.1 EXAMINATION in A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. I..OUVERS AND VENTS 10200-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 .� Smith College Northampton, MA G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver: 1. Louver Depth: 4 inches (100 mm). 2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements, but not less than 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for frames. .,.� 3. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: Not less than 6.0 sq. ft. (0.56 sq. m) for 48-inch-(1.2-m-)wide by 48-inch- (1.2-m-)high louver. b. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 80 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rain fall rate of 3 inches (75 mm) per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph(13 m/s)at a core area intake velocity of 300 fpm(1.5 m/s). 2.5 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening. B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches(300 mm) o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: ..� 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm)wire. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish louvers after assembly. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College No Northampton, MA C. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Greenheck. ,R e. Metal Form Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Reliable Products; Hart&Cooley, Inc. g. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless ww otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. ww 2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as an necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Mullions: Fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs 'o and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. 1. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where indicated. MR C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and Sill,to produce uniform appearance. *■ D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Exterior flange, unless otherwise indicated. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated. 04 1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-3 .w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA wp manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. ON 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. RM B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing. ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. w. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver. air 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .A A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. we 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ow 1. Louvers: a. Airline Products Co. b. Airolite Company(The). LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-2 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 10200-LOUVERS AND VENTS W PART 1 -GENERAL an 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS OR A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. NO 1.2 SUMMARY on A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. a" B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining construction. 2. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions,which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of louvers. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. uA 2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft, acting inward or outward. B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior plaster primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. E. Wood: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. F. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: I. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. ■.. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over an interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. C. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd-or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish. END OF SECTION 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 14 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Plywood: Provide the following finish systems over exterior plywood: on 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coat over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. F. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. G. Existing Steeple: Provide the following finish systems over existing metal surfaces: e�w 1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. W a. Prep: Rust Converter Coating on areas of surface rust. b. Primer: Primer under acrylic finishes. C. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete (except treads): Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete substrates: on 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Same as finish coat. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. B. Concrete Stair Treads: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete stair treads: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Floor, Porch and Deck Enamel. W C. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. to a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. D. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new interior plaster surfaces: PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912. 13 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Exisitng Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry substrates: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: One finish coat over spot primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. B. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels: Provide the following finish systems over exterior, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. rimer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. C. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Provide the following finish systems over exterior gypsum soffit board: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over an exterior alkyd-or alkali-resistant primer. �* a. Primer: Exterior gypsum soffit board primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. D. Smooth Wood: Provide the following finish systems over smooth wood siding, wood trim, and other smooth exterior wood surfaces: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats (one coat over existing spot primed wood) over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. 2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish for Wood Doors: Two finish coats finish coats over a primer. .s� a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 12 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA F. Mechanical items to be painted include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. W 4. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 5. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in o® first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, MW nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 10 3.5 PROTECTION PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 11 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .r place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through , registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. W. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. .. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to �+ ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat .. surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. .� C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by w. manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items �* exposed in occupied spaces. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. go 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 6. Existing Painted Interior Surfaces: Clean, scrape loose paint, sand, dust and spot prime. 7. Existing Painted Exterior Wood: Scrape loose paint, sand, dust and spot prime. 8. Existing Exterior Metal (Steeple): Wire brush and prime with rust-inhibiting primer. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. !�w 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-9 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ., B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. on 3.2 PREPARATION aw A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface an preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using �* workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that wu could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. * b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content ** exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912.8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). D. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 271: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). E. Porch and Floor Enamel: Satin gloss urethane modified acrylic latex. 1. PPG; Pittsburgh Paints 3-510 series Floor, Porch and Deck Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of 1.0 mils(0.027mm). an 2.8 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. C. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear varnish. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre No. 435. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ,.. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). MP B. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer MW No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory- formulated alkyd-or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). D. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). E. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film .R thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House& Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a „ dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior applications 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). w. B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. am PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Colors: Match existing finishes as indicated in the Color Schedule. 2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block fillers. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils(0.206 mm). 2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Acrylic Masonry Sealer No. 066: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm). w B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory-formulated alkyd- or alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. e 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). C. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). D. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). E. Exterior Rust-Converting Primers: Factory formulated modified latex coating that chemically converts rust into a black inert non-corrosive iron complex. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Rust-Converter Coating No. M82: Applied with brush after removing loose scale rust and deteriorated coating and washed. Prime with Moore's M04 Primer within 48 hours. no 2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ., 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air MR, are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding .o air are between 45 and 95 deg F(7 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. .� 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. No PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS me A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles to describe acceptable paint systems; other products of equal ` quality may be used by any of the listed acceptable manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 4. Pratt& Lambert aw 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL aw A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are am compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types so specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. ■W 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. go C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. ON Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each an Sample for location and application. go 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. ■w B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. OR 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers go bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. ■o 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. ON 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. w PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-3 Ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .F 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Copper and copper alloys. d. Bronze and brass. .. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming exterior w architectural woodwork. 4. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. .. 5. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 6. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for shop priming unclad wood windows. E. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section .. affected by alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when *� measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. on 1.4 SUBMITTALS ow A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 09912-PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 10 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 40 1.2 SUMMARY „e A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interioritems and surfaces. go 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is 'o not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 4" 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and aw labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Acoustical wall panels. b. Door and window hardware C. Elevator entrance doors and frames. d. Elevator equipment. e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. f. Light fixtures and wiring devices. g. Existing surfaces designated to remain 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Pipe spaces. d. Duct shafts. e. Elevator shafts. PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College " Northampton, MA A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or w recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 no �w w CARPET 09680-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Level adjoining border edges. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION CARPET 09680-4 �r Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. CPT-2: Lees;Vestal D7806 a. Color: 411 jade. 3. CPT-3: Lees;Wayfinder II D7686 a. Color: 575 Royal Purple. B. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard Unibond backing. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: go 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 -EXECUTION on 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. on CARPET 09680-3 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering .. Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .. A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." am B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace w" carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss .o of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. s, PART 2 - PRODUCTS no 2.1 CARPET A. Product[s]: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. CPT-1: Lees;Virtue, D7799 a. Color: 411 Jade. CARPET 09680-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 09680-CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Broadloom carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch-(300-mm-)square Sample. 2. Carpet Seam: 6-inch(150-mm)Sample. 3. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. CARPET 09680- 1 ow Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows: am 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 no inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove we bar marks). or 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing floor coverings: ap 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. no 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. ■„ B. Protect floor coverings against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. .� 1. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free of soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Seal linoleum as recommended by manufacturer but with not less than two coats of floor polish. b. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. C. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover linoleum floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 -4 Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of 40 floor coverings. B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. D. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL w A. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets,pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. B. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. C. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to W produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. D. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 3.4 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 -3 am Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA a, A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Forbo Industries, Inc.; Marmoleum, Fresco. B. Color and Pattern: As indicated in Color Schedule. .� C. Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 2034. 1. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches (1980 mm)wide. D. Seaming Method: Heat welded. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor covering manufacturer for products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. m 1. Color: As recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 -2 Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 09654-LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes linoleum sheet floor coverings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Floor Tile" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor coverings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturers standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by- no 230-mm) sections of each color and pattern of linoleum floor covering required. C. Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated. on 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654 - 1 aw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA aw 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. .. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. ,,m Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, MW and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 'MR 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. so END OF SECTION 09651 11e .. MW IM MW IM ow RM =0 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks,voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. an C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. so F. Job-Formed Corners: on 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to go produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave ON back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. on 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates OR throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of No resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. .� 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer. E. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in •+� substrates. F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least , 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to .. be installed. G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain matching existing patterns. .� C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -4 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Group(Manufacturing Method): I(solid, homogeneous) . D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe)at resilient flooring; Straight(toeless) at carpet. E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch(3.2 mm). F. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Corners: Job formed for staight base and premolded for coved base. 1. Inside Corners: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. an 2.5 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES on A. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications; Reducer strip for resilient floor covering; Joiner for tile and carpet. 1. johnsonite; Match base in location. B. Material: Rubber. on C. Profile and Dimensions: As selected from manufacturer's standard accessories. 2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. on PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. I. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -3 an Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA so 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. .. 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.. w 2. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 3. Mannington Mills, Inc. 4. Tarkett Inc. B. Wearing Surface: Smooth. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). E. Color/Pattern: Match existing VCT in main chapel. w 2.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. Johnsonite; Rubber Base, color and style as indicated 2. Stoler Industries;Allstate Rubber Base, Color 30, coved base. B. Type (Material Requirement): Rubber. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w� Northampton, MA SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 -GENERAL go 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ww 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile(VCT). 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section"Linoleum Floor Coverings" for linoleum floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS no A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches(300 mm)long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. w C. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F(32 deg Q. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 , 1 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. .w D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. ... 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel on ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook." op B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling OR plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ..� C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, ,^ Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-(2.69-mm-) diameter wire. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Products: .� 1. Donn DX. B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 9/16-inch-(15-mm-)wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. .. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. w. C. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel wo edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicate that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS on A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc.; Omni High NRC panels B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as w follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2,water felted. 2. Color:White C. LR: Not less than 0.84. D. NRC: Not less than .65,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. E. CAC: Not less than 35. F. Edge Detail: SLT. G. Thickness: 3/4 inch(19 mm). H. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). - 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ° 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. .w C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and .� ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling W attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. �w D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size or 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color. r .C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA + " 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall/partition panels to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum base panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of • panels. B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.10 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts metal door frames,windows, and other units in veneer plaster,groove finish coat to eliminate spalling. 2. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from exposure to light. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to faded face paper according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect. +.. B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit gypsum veneer plaster in the following areas where veneer plaster will be concealed from view in the completed Work. Fire tape joints where required to maintain fire- resistance rating. Do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. 1. Above suspended ceilings. Im 2. In elevator shaftwall ceiling. C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish. am END OF SECTION 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215- 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer plaster, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent e panels not less than one framing member. D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate ,o supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. OR F. Attach panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. go G. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m)in area. 2. Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4-to 9.5- mm-)wide joints to install sealant. w 1. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-(6.4-to 12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with metal edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. J. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. K. Fastener Spacing: According to referenced gypsum base for gypsum veneer plaster application standard, manufacturer's written recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) O.C. for vertical applications. w 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches(203.2 mm) o.c. 3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -9 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where they abut structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assemblies and laterally support assemblies. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum veneer plaster assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch(3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over +*� frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum base panels. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm)short of full height to provide perimeter relief. a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. �. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1. Single-Layer Construction: 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 APPLYING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844, unless manufacturer's written recommendations are more stringent. 1. Do not allow gypsum base to fade from exposure to light. 2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) offsets between planes of gypsum base faces, and 1/8 inch in 8 feet(3 mm in 2.4 m) for level, plumb,warp, and bow. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -8 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing. B. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. C. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. an 3.3 PREPARATION FOR VENEER PLASTER FINISHES so A. Monolithic Concrete Substrates: Prepare for gypsum veneer plastering according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations and as follows: 1. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles,grease, oil, incompatible curing compounds, form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with bonding compound and plaster. 2. Remove ridges and protrusions greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) and fill all depressions greater than 1/4 inch(6 mm)with portland cement mortar. Allow to set and dry. 3. Apply bonding compound on dry and fully cured concrete substrates. B. Masonry Substrates: Prepare for gypsum veneer plastering according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. Clean surfaces to remove dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with plaster. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 844 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum veneer plaster assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Materials: 16 ga. Steel frame with 14 ga. Steel door with integral galvanized steel drywall bead, steel cam lock and spring hinges. M+ 1. Size: 24 inches by 36 inches. ON 2.10 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and no manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Bonding Compound for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 631. No C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum base face-layer panels to base-layer panels in multilayer construction. ow D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. ow 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel no manufacturer. E. Isolation Strip at Masonry Walls: 40 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)thick, in width to suit steel stud size. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), .A produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber-type requirements of assembly. no 2.11 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES aw A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. am PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use where finish terminates with adjacent finishes. 2.7 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape: s 1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: In material recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for applications indicated. W C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape: 1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Material produced and recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material and gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: w a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.9 ACCESS PANELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide access doors by one of the following: 1. Karp Associates, Inc. 2. Larson's Manufacturing Co. 3. Milcor LP. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Provide powder-actuated fasteners with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 1190. G. Thermal Insulation Blankets: ASTM C 665 for Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber-blanket insulation , produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool. 2.4 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Cameo Veneer Plaster. , b. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal Plaster. C. United States Gypsum Co.; DIAMOND Interior Finish Plaster. B. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587 and formulated for application directly over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material. an 2.5 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Exterior Gypsum Panels: ASTM C 931 panels with additives for increased sag resistance and exterior applications: am 1. Regular Type: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) thick. C. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588 and products of same manufacturer as plaster. Im 1. Regular Type: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) thick. D. Backing Panels for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 588 gypsum base or ASTM C 36 gypsum w wallboard, as recommended by manufacturer for application method indicated. 1. Core: Matching face layer, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: Matching face layer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING o. A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm). No B. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. eat 2.3 SHAFT-WALL COMPONENTS A. General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. wo 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: 4 inches(101.6 mm). 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness:0.0 17 9 inch(0.45 mm). C. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches (51 mm), in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Same as studs. D. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1-inch(25.4-mm)thickness and with moisture-resistant paper faces. E. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Edges: Tapered. w. F. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of OR track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. so GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -3 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA OF B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having w» jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING .. A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 80 deg F .. (27 deg C) for 7 days before application of gypsum base and gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is dry. C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly. 1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal drying conditions. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during veneer plaster application and until it is dry. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. -Dale/Incor. am 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. 5. National Gypsum Company. am B. Steel Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ew Northampton, MA SECTION 09215-GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS W A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. on 1.2 SUMMARY W, A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gypsum veneer plaster, gypsum veneer plaster over masonry surfaces, and gypsum base for veneer plaster. 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 3. Horizontal shaft enclosures. 4. Exterior gypsum soffits. 5. Ceiling Access Panels. on 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum veneer plaster assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch (300-mm) length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Gypsum Veneer Plaster Products: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, so including gypsum base, joint reinforcing tape, embedding material, and plasters, from a single manufacturer. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 1 09900 Painting Wall Paint&Trim Elevator Addition Benjamin Moore-See Specifications Match paint color to existing color in stair wells(off-white) Wall Paint&Trim Existing stairwell Benjamin Moore-See Specifications Match to existing (off-white) Concrete stair treads, metal risers, Stairs Benjamin Moore-See Specifications Match to existing(Concrete- nosings, stringers, railings rusty brown and metal off- white) Wall and trim paint Lounge 004 Benjamin Moore-See Specifications Match to Existing(Off-white Patch and repair as required at new walls&yellow trim) construction areas 12484 Floor Mats&Frames Berber Carpeting(Walk-off mat) 100EL(1 st floor elevator Mats Inc., Boston Collection, Cranberry#40 lobby)and elevator cab "Kenmore"style floor Smith College Kuhn Riddle Architects Project Helen Hills Hills Chapel- Phase 2 Northampton, MA Amherst, M MA Color Schedule Section / Product Location Product Color/Style Notes 09651 Resilient Tile Flooring Rubber Base Use with linoleum in Allstate 30(dark purple) Kitchen OOK and against purple carpet border in Lounge 004 Rubber Base Use with Lees Virtue Johnsonite 73 Palm Leaf(green) carpet Rubber Base Use with black VCT in Johnsonite 40 Black stairwells Vinyl Composition Tile (Resit.) 100ST3,200 EL, 200S, Match new VCT manufacturer,color, Match to Existing(Black) 200ST3 (1st&2nd floor graining appearance to existing stair landings&2nd floor elevator lobby&storage) 09654 Linoleum Flooring Linoleum Sheet Kitchen OOK Forbo Industries, Marmoleum Fresco 3824 Twilight Purple 09680 Carpet Broadloom Carpet(Small Patterned Elevator Lobby OOEL, Stair Lees,Virtue, D7799 411 Jade ***Match dye lot to existing carpet in Field-CPT 1 ) landing OOST3 and Ramp Corridor OOC. Refer to attached carpet pattern drawing Broadloom Carpet(Medium Patterned Lounge 004 Lees,Vestal D7806 411 Jade Refer to attached carpet pattern Field-CPT 2) drawing Broadloom Carpet(Solid Accent- Lounge 004 Lees,Wayfinder II D7686 575 Royal Purple Refer to attached carpet pattem CPT 3) drawing Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ww Northampton, MA painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. on 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 rnm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. w 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08711 we DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 11 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. BHMA 632/605 : Polished Brass, clear coated, over base metal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for .� installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. e� B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI Al 15 series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W series. .. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 4. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.21. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. me 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally w prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.13 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -9 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA go 2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16. C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1. 4, D. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. .M 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. E. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 ow inch (16 by 19 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. F. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 aw inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. so 2.10 DOOR GASKETING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering „P products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Door Gasketing: a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). .s b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 2. Door Bottoms: a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22. C. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.7 OPERATING TRIM A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Ives: H. B. Ives(IVS). 3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). go B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6. C. Materials: Fabricate from brass or bronze. 'm D. Push-Pull Design: Rockwood 107x70B or equal. 2.8 CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). 2. Concealed Closers: 40 a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. C. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's"Directory of Certified Door Closers." D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency go of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). on 3. Ives: H. B. Ives(IVS). 4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -7 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .m E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Install temporary cylinders with feature that permits voiding of ••■ construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner. or F. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 3. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. C. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.6 STRIKES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Electric Strikes: a. Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A 156.13. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 4. Electric Strikes: BHMAA156.5. C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with .� curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: .,R 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. .. op DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College �* Northampton, MA 3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: W 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch(12.7-mm)latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch(19-mm)latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch(25-mm)bolt throw. F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. A 2.4 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Electromagnetic Locks: Electrically powered locks of strength and configuration indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following: 1. Strength Ranking: 1500 lbf(6672 N)as tested according to BHMA A156.23. on 2. Inductive Kickback: Not more than 53-V peak voltage, as tested according to BHMA A156.23. 3. Residual Magnetism: Not more than 0 lbf(0 N) to separate door from magnet, as tested according to BHMA A156.23. B. Electromechanical Locks: Motor-operated locks of types and grades indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following: 1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated. 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. B. Standards: Comply with the following: on 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. W C. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Master Ring Cylinders. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings: 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Outswinging exterior doors. .P b. Outswinging corridor doors with locks. 2. Corners: Square .R F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. am 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Extra Long Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: s. 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 2. Electromagnetic Locks and Latches: a. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIB. b. Von Duprin, Inc.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD). 3. Electromechanical Locks and Latches: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). B. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Locks& Latches." 2. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Electromagnetic& Delayed Egress Locks." 3. Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Electromagnetic & Delayed Egress Locks." C. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1. Lever: Newport NSA except NSM where indicated. D. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: so 1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. 2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13. WW DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College *A Northampton, MA PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: an 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. �w 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hinges: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). go 2. Pivots and Pivot Hinges: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. 3. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA A156.17. 4. Pivots: BHMA A156.4. C. Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: Maximum Door Size (inches) Hinge Standard Heavy Height Weight Weight (inches) 36 by 84 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 42 by 90 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 48 by 120 by 1-3/4 5 0.146 0.190 ► D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -3 as Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with required systems connections. 1.7 WARRANTY(included for Owner's RFP's) A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty r period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years. D. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. E. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer including replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. .w DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 087 11 -DOOR HARDWARE ■ PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes INSTALIATIONof the following: 1. Commercial door hardware provided by the owner for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Electrified door hardware. 3. Final replacement cores provided by Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Owner's agent will provide templates for preparing doors and frames for installation and product data with installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and " ! profiles, and finishes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and ew masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. �r B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. w END OF SECTION 08550 s WOOD WINDOWS 08550-7 M Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ., G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.6 WOOD FINISHES A. Factory-Primed Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces. No PART 3 - EXECUTION 4W 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall fleshings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction wee debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. ws C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-6 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College e� Northampton, MA B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units with simulated divided lites and spacer bars. su C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Cadmium-plated hardware is not permitted. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide white finish to standard units. B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. 1. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed double coil spring-loaded, block-and-tackle type of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wood windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. w B. General: Fabricate wood windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with requirements and that meet or exceed AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 performance requirements for the following window type and performance class. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 1. Double-Hung Windows: C. 2. Fixed Frames: C. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. E. Provide extended sill section as indicated on drawings. F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches (2500 mm width plus length), glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing' and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-5 aw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ,,.w 1. Primed Wood Windows: a. Double-Hung Windows: ON 1) Marvin Windows and Doors. a) Magnum Double-Hung b. Fixed Windows: 1) Marvin Windows and Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln-dried to a moisture " content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm)wide; water-repellent preservative treated. ww B. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. a C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 1�. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when �• wood window is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. G. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. �. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-4 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA D. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and are based on the specific system indicated. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with " Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. ,ew 5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulting glass failure. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: WOOD WINDOWS 08550-3 .w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA „® 2. Performance Grade: 30. 3. Exception to AAXWNWWDA 101/I.S.2: In addition to requirements for performance class and performance grade, design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass no edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length at design pressure based on the following: a. Testing performed according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test. C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2,Air Infiltration Test. 1. Maximum Rate: 0.25 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. D. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/NWWDA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2,Water Resistance Test. E. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to ASTM E 1423. 1. U-Value: 0.51 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F(3.17 W/sq. m x K). F. Double-Hung Windows: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for the following tests: 1. Operating Force. 2. Deglazing: When tested according to ASTM E 987. w 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. am 2. Joinery details. 3. Flashing and drainage details. 4. Weather-stripping details. 5. Glazing details. 6. Window cleaning provisions. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type, grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use of down- sized test units will not be accepted. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA SECTION 08550-WOOD WINDOWS NO PART 1 -GENERAL Im 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following wood-framed window product types: 1. Double-hung windows. 2. Fixed frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section"Louvers" for louvers placed in fixed wood frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. B. Structural test pressure, for uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of design pressure. C. Minimum test size is smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 1. Performance Class: C. WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 1 MR Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College r Northampton, MA C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-5 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION so A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. ow 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. am B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. aw 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire- rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. I. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees)on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section"Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College s Northampton, MA a. Artistic Doors and Windows. b. Dimension Millworks. C. ENJO Doors and Windows. d. Karona, Inc. e. Maiman Company(The). f. Pinecrest. g. Woodtech Trading Company. 2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Construction, General: Comply with the following requirements: 40 1. Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Premium. 2. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Same species and cut as existing doors. 3. Stile and Rail Construction for Transparent Finish: Veneered, finger-jointed softwood core with edges of species indicated. 4. Raised Panel Construction for Transparent Finish: Veneered, wood-based panel product 0* with mitered, raised rims made from matching clear lumber. B. Exterior Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Stile and Rail Widths: Manufacturer's standard,but not less than the following: a. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 5-3/8 inches(137 mm). b. Bottom Rails: 11-3/8 inches (289 mm). 2. Molding Profile: Match existing profile. 3. Raised Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1-1/8 inches (29 mm). 4. Panel Design: As indicated. C. Interior Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Stile and Rail Widths: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than the following: a. Stiles,Top and Intermediate Rails: 5 inches (125 mm). b. Bottom Rails: 9 inches(229 mm). 2. Molding Profile: Match existing profile. 3. Raised Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1-1/8 inches(29 mm). 4. Panel Design: As indicated. D. Interior Fire Doors: Fire-rated doors with 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick, edged and veneered mineral-core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch- (29-mm-) thick, rim-raised veneered mineral-core panels, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting. B. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water repellent to comply with NWWDA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. on STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-3 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 4W a. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with NWWDA LS.6. ow 2. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, construction, finish, and other requirements. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. w 1. Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Stile and Rail Doors of Stock Design and Construction: ..R a. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division. b. Jeld-Wen, Inc. C. Louisiana Pacific Corp. d. Maywood, Inc. e. Morgan Manufacturing. f. Nicolai Door; a Morgan Products Ltd. Company. g. Schumacher: F.E. Schumacher Co., Inc. h. Semling-Menke Co., Inc. i. Simpson Door Company. .wr 2. Stile and Rail Doors of Special Design and Construction: STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212,2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 08212-STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior stile and rail wood doors with raised panels. 2. Interior stile and rail wood doors with raised panels. 3. Interior stile and rail wood fire doors with raised panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail on Doors." STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212- 1 go Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College M Northampton, MA 3.3 ADJUSTING ew A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors ,"X may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08211 a� ■w FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -5 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. am 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire- rated doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .� 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 13. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. w.a C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire- ow rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. ow Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting." FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -4 on Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL s A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium,with Grade AA faces. 2. Species and Cut: Match,existing panel doors for species and cut. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 6. Stiles: Same species as faces. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. B. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or an manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw- W holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge "s, construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. 4. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals for pairs of fire-rated doors, unless otherwise indicated. a. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices). 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. w� 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed,wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. �. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84- inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch(0.25 mm in a 75-mm)span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty sha11 be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. w. PART 2 -PRODUCTS .o 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the on following: 1. Flush Wood Doors: .. a. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division. b. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. C. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. ow d. Weyerhaeuser Company. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2 No Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL as 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer, faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section" Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door, elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. an 2. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. w END OF SECTION 08110 w as W on xx STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1W 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. G. Reinforce frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. 2.5 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. .� After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening +�•� anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames. 6. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 7. For openings 90 inches(2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge w and strike jambs. 8. Fill exposed countersunk fasteners with epoxy filler, sand smooth and prime after installation of frame. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ws Northampton, MA 2.3 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick steel sheet for: 1. Wood doors. C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510(ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 00 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. 1. Rigid mineral-fiber board. B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat heads for exposed screws and bolts. "a E. Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and W-4 frame preparation for hardware. F. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. on STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .W 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent aw requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. 11. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. •• C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a ■p humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. am PART 2 - PRODUCTS MW 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the so following: 1. Steel Frames: am a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. a, C. Pioneer Industries Inc. d. Republic Builders Products. e. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. so 2.2 MATERIALS MW A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 go Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College OR Northampton, MA SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES NO PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS am A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel door frames. 2. Fire-rated door frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchors and grouting frames in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 2. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule wM for doors and frames. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College �* Northampton, MA C. NR-201; Pecora Corporation. d. Flexiprene PSI.951; Polymeric Systems, Inc. e. SL 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component) and P(pourable). No 3. Class: 25. 4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T(traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. 6. Applications: Horizontal exterior joints 3.7 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: a. Bostik 300; Bostik Inc. b. PTI 757; H.B.Fuller Company. wie C. NuFlex 232; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. BC-158; Pecora Corporation. e. Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. f. Tremco Butyl Sealant;Tremco. 2. Applications: Metal flashing joints. 3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: on a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp.,United States Gypsum Co. 2. Applications: Interior veneer plaster and substrates. END OF SECTION 07920 go JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 7 .w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of tooled joints. *+ 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without .� deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant [ES-#]: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: a. Deck-O-Seal One Step;W.R. Meadows, Inc. b. Thiokol 1P; Morton International, Inc. C. GC-9 Synthacalk; Pecora Corporation. d. PSI-7000; Polymeric Systems, Inc. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. 6. Applications: All exterior applications except horizontal joints B. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc. b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6 N. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College No Northampton, MA a. Metal. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas W of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS W A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants No and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. MW 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. s PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from WF above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible W, with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade, class, and uses. sm 2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1085 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. " 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .. A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single .. manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING am A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and .a mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the .. following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint �. sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F(4.4 deg C). .. 3. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. JOINT SEAIANTS 07920-2 No Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: W 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. ON C. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. am C. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. e. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and ` gaskets. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum veneer plaster partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ox Northampton, MA fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7 loll I .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA •p temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F(4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at im temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg Q. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of ow sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Pretinning is not required for lead-coated copper. no 2. Copper Soldering: Tin uncoated copper surfaces at edges of sheets using solder recommended for copper work. 3. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated, do not tin edges, but wire brush lead coating before soldering. 4. Lead-Coated Copper Soldering: Wire brush edges of sheets before soldering. 5. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend .. counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with butyl sealant. 3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according s to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm)beyond wall openings. aw 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. no B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. sm C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused MP SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 200t Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, Solder, welding rods, protective coatings7 separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substratest protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim witkout excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to tine and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seanis with minimum exposure of solder,welds, and butyl sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating skeet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 in) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch (25 mm)deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws. 1. Copper Use copper or staintess-steel fasteners. 14. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required for watertight construction. I Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 Po Am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for �. application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion ` joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Accessories: Bronze wire ball downspout strainer. 2. Gutters: Fabricate from the following material: �• a. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.70 mm thick). B. Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.70 mm thick). 2.5 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.70 mm thick). B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.70 mm thick). . C. Masonry Counter Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead-Coated Copper: 21.2 oz./sq. ft. (0.75 mm thick). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. S1-IEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing ! and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and w not less than 7/8 inch(22 mm)long,barbed with large head. 2. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. C. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. D. Solder for Lead-Coated Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain on watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.3 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA s Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. ®s" C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 40 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material • descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Copper Standard: Comply with CDA's"Copper in Architecture Handbook." B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." + 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING .� A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. ws. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370;Temper H00 or HO 1, cold-rolled copper sheet. B. Lead-Coated Copper Sheet: ASTM B 101, Temper H00 and HO I, cold-rolled copper sheet, of weight (thickness) indicated below, coated both sides with lead weighing not less than 12 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.59 kg/sq. m) nor more than 15 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.73 kg/sq. m) of copper sheet (total weight of lead applied equally to both sides). 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. w 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Formed roof drainage system. 2. Formed steep-slope roof flashing and trim. 3. Formed wall flashing and trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing reglets. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing through-wall flashing, reglets, and other sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Division 7 Section"Slate Shingles" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. �w 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1 No Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Slate Shingle Installation: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to written recommendations of manufacturer and details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing Manual." Unless otherwise indicated, provide at least a 3-inch (75-mm) head lap between succeeding courses of slate shingles and break (stagger) joints between courses a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Provide a 2-inch (50-mm) projection of slate at eaves and 1-inch (25-mm) w projection at gables. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof. 1. Nail slate shingles so nail heads just touch slate lightly. Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shingle above. ON 2. Cut slate at valleys to form open valleys with a straight border. Taper valleys from a 2-inch (50-mm) exposure of metal flashing on each side of valley at top and increase exposure by 1 inch (25 mm) (each side)per 96 inches (2400 mm) of valley length. E. Install snow guards as field slate is installed according to manufacturer's written installation instructions and NRCA's"Steep Roofing Manual." 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING + A. Remove and replace damaged or broken slates. B. Remove excess slate and debris from Project site. END OF SECTION 07315 w SLATE SHINGLES 07315 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, extruded aluminum units with 3 solid bars and brackets designed for use with slate shingles and complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring. E. Ridge and Hip Covers: Roll ridge covers from 20 oz./sq. ft. cold rolled copper. 1. Accessories: Fabricate flashing, splices, end caps, and other accessories from matching metal according to SMACNA procedures and details. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which slate shingle Work is to be performed; notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with slate shingle Work only after �■ unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Cover or otherwise plug drains to prevent entrance of slate shingle trimmings and debris. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Substrate: Proceed with slate shingle installation only after substrate construction, vent stacks, and other penetrating work is complete and when substrate materials are dry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Sheet Metal Flashing Installation: Install sheet metal flashing, vent flashing, and edge protection as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing Manual." 1. Fabricate metal flashings at open valleys with a minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high standing rib at center of valley to break force of water flow. Extend metal flashing a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) onto roof deck on each side of valley. 2. Where flashings occur perpendicular to slope, return sheet metal a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm)under shingles. 3. If open valley length exceeds 12 feet (3.6 m), taper valleys by increasing width of valley .. flashing by 2 inches (50 mm), for 1 inch (25 mm) on each side, for each 96 inches (2400 mm) of valley. B. Ice-Protection Underlayment: Install continuous bituminous underlayment base sheet over entire roof. C. Felt Underlayment Installation: Apply one layer of felt over entire roof surface, beginning at eaves, with courses perpendicular to slope of roof. Lap succeeding courses 2 inches (50 mm) minimum, with 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum end laps. Fasten with sufficient nails to hold in place until slate shingles are installed. SLATE SHINGLES 07315-4 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ■! Northampton, MA A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, No. 30 asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt; minimum 36-inch-(900-mm-)wide rolls. B. Modified Bituminous Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet;40 mils (1 mm)thick. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer. �w 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Nonreinforced: Polyethylene backed. go 1) CCW 707; Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing. 2) WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation. 3) Grace Ice and Water Shield;W.R. Grace&Co. 4) Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Roofing Nails: 0.1055-inch-(2.7-mm-) diameter-shank, hot-dip galvanized steel, Type ES, barbed- shank roofing nails; minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) diameter head, and long enough to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. 00 B. Slating Nails: Nonferrous-metal, large flat-head slating nail long enough to penetrate either completely through or at least 1 inch(19 mm) into sheathing. 1. Minimum Nail Length for Shingles More Than 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Thick: Two times the shingle thickness plus 1 inch (25 mm). �w 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1085, one-part, nonsag, nonstaining, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids;with a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: a. Chem-Calk 300; Bostik Inc. b. BC-158; Pecora Corporation. C. Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. d. Tremco Butyl Sealant 505;Tremco, Inc. B. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant as recommended in writing by shingle manufacturer. Where sealant will be exposed, provide in color matching shingle. C. Mastic: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated, asphalt cement designed for trowel application. SLATE SHINGLES 07315 -3 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ... B. Store and handle roofing materials to prevent breakage and ensure dryness. Store in a dry, well- ventilated, weathertight place. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or another raised surface. C. Do not leave unused felts on roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather or other moisture sources. .. D. Handle and store materials and equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide slate shingles by one of the following: 1. Buckingham-Virginia Slate Corp. a, 2. New England Slate, Inc. 3. Vermont Structural Slate Company, Inc. 00 2.2 SHINGLES A. Slate Shingles: Hard, dense, sound rock, machine punched or drilled for two nails located for wo proper head lap. No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof. No ribbons in exposed portion of shingle, and curvature not to exceed 1/8 inch per 12 inches (3 mm per 300 ow mm). 1. Classification: ASTM C 406. .� a. Grade Sl: Expected service life more than 75 years. 2. Thickness: Nominal 1/4 inch(6 mm). , 3. Length: 18 inches (450 mm); 7-1/2-inch(190-mm)exposure with 3-inch (75-mm)lap. 4. Width: 10 inches (250 mm). 5. Butt Shape: Standard square cut. .., 6. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Permanent or unfading. 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SHEET METAL FLASHING A. Copper Flashing: ASTM B 370, temper H00 (cold rolled), unless temper 060 is required for .. forming; 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENTS SLATE SHINGLES 07315-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 07315-SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes slate shingles for standard-slate roofs. B. Related Sections include the following: w 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for roof deck, cant strips,battens, and nailers. 2. Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing, valleys, gutters, and downspouts. 3. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units * showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of slate shingle indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Slate: Obtain each variety of slate from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide Installer's warranty for slate for 5 years after time of Final Completion. 1. Inspect for defects and replace broken or missing slate on an annual basis; more often if required. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver slate shingles to Project site and store as close as possible to the point of installation to minimize damage while handling. an SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 1 ON Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am C. Foam in place voids and spaces around door and window frames with self-expanding foam sealant. IM 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and ow other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 4W END OF SECTION 07210 no .,A BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and �w application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more so than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, NO 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, .m and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. .. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: .. a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Owens Corning. C. Tenneco Building Products. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. **� d. Owens Corning. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced �. standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated. C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 ON Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION ". PART 1 -GENERAL w 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS we A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY �r A. This Section includes the following: 1. Foundation wall insulation(supporting backfill). 2. Loose-fill building insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Subdrainage" for insulated drainage panels. 2. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells. 4. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood framing. 5. Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for insulation installed with waterproofing. 6. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 7. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Veneer Plaster" for insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall and partition assemblies. 8. Division 15 Section for"Pipe Insulation." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE a A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA G. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. 3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION 'o A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of "a entrapped gases, with an average wet film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils (1.3 mm)at any point. 3.3 CURING, PROTECTING,AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07141 war COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -3 aw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: .. 1. Single-Component, Modified Polymer-enhanced Asphaltic Waterproofing: a. Watchdog Waterproofing; Koch Industries. .. 2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and as follows: "' 1. Solids: 64 percent by weight or 2. Density: 8.Ilbs/gal 3. Vapor Permeance: ASTM E-96; 0.44 perms MR PART 3 - EXECUTION .. 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide a` clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. 1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by or plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. B. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other ., penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. E. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply a double thickness of waterproofing and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. F. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and "' waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. ow COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -2 o Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College aw Northampton, MA SECTION 07141 -COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING an PART 1 ,GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cold fluid-applied polymer-enhanced asphalt waterproofing. *o 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 STORAGE A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate ' temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate,when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above dew point. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer and Installer, and agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight for a period of five years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS COLD FLUIDAPPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. no E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches(1500 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing supports into underside of countertop. ..e G. Stairwork and Rails: Blind screw railings to metal work, and railings to newel posts. Support wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 w INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match existing. D. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows: 1. Handrails: Transparent. 2.8 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Priming of interior architectural woodwork required to be performed at fabrication shop are specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork and for material and application requirements for woodwork not specified to receive final finish in this Section. B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing me architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to ew concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. pm 3.2 INSTALLATION go A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. go B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb(including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. * " D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 w .m Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. am C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: im 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be .� complete. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Premium. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except .� for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. F. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. ow 2.6 WOOD COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AV/1 Section 400 requirements for wood countertops. �. B. Grade: Premium. C. Material: Paint grade hardwood plywood with hardwood edge. 2.7 STAIRWORK AND RAILS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 800. ••� B. Grade: Premium. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Existing Profiles: Where drawings indicate "match existing," inspect field conditions and note any discrepancies from Reference Drawings. Note differences on Shop Drawings. Standard profiles may be accepted only if, in the Architect's opinion, the profile does not significantly differ from original profile indicated to be matched. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the Owner's approved sub-contractors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AV/1 quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match existing species and cut. C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: L Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA No 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork .. similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to aw that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and ,. other requirements. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions"Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify �.. dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ? A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Wood countertops. 3. Interior ornamental work. 4. Stairwork and rails. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors." 4. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors." 5. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for stock wood windows. 6. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 48 inches (1200 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). F. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA •. 2.5 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Premium. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where shipping limitations require field assembly. ■w E. Wood Species: Western red cedar orEastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. am 1. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. no 2.6 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species: Western red cedar, Ponderosa pine, Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. 1. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. wo 2.7 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AV/1 Section 900. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exterior architectural woodwork by one of the Owner's approved sub-contractors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of exterior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Nails: Hot-dip galvanized, or stainless steel. C. Screws: Brass, hot-dip galvanized, or stainless steel. 1. For metal framing supports, provide self-drilling screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood(Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch 0.5 mm). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar '? items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -3 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA •m A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 4W B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to .. avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 3. Existing Profiles: Where drawings indicate "match existing," inspect field conditions and .� note any discrepancies from Reference Drawings. Note differences on Shop Drawings. Standard profiles may be accepted only if, in the Architect's opinion, the profile does not significantly differ from original profile indicated to be matched. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported " and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 06401-EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 40 A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior profiled standing and running trim. 2. Exterior ornamental work including the following: a. Pilasters. 3. Exterior frames and jambs. 4. Shop priming exterior woodwork. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for exterior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors." 4. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for stock wood windows. w 5. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of exterior architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA or 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch(1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. .m 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths .. of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints,where necessary for alignment. 1. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 2. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill �., holes. 3. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION A. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to «� penetrate more than one thickness of siding. 1. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses. B. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation. C. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. 3.6 ADJUSTING .� A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes .R to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches(125 mm). 2. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds. C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch(25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm)or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3-EXECUTION ON 3.1 EXAMINATION on A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION - A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section"Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-5 WK Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no 1. Shelf Brackets: Prime-painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where rod is indicated. go B. Clothes Rods: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, clear, kiln-dried softwood rods; either Douglas fir or southern pine. .w 2.7 ORNAMENTAL WOOD COLUMNS A. Factory fabricate columns for opaque finish from clear, kiln-dried, western red cedar, eastern 4W white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine. B. Shafts: Built up from tongue-and-groove staves joined with waterproof glue. Lathe turn shafts to provide indicated base diameter and true architectural entasis taper. C. Capital and Base: Built-up from wood components with waterproof glue. Turn circular elements on lathes. D. Plinths: For exterior columns, provide cast-aluminum or molded glass-fiber-reinforced plastic .� plinths constructed to ventilate the interior of column shaft. E. Treatment and Finishing: 1. Treat wood columns for opaque finish with water-repellant preservative by nonpressure process. 2. Coat inside of exterior column shafts with bituminous mastic. .. 3. Prime columns for opaque finish with two coats of exterior alkyd wood primer compatible with specified topcoats. am 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS .m A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, ..� material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. C. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. 2.9 FABRICATION FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards'Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1. 2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Painted Applications: Kiln-dried, solid lumber with surfaced (smooth) face and of the following species and grade: 1. Grade A western red cedar; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Grade Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir- tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. B. MDO Trim: Exterior Grade B-B, MDO plywood. 2.4 SIDING A. Bevel Siding: Kiln-dried bevel siding complying with DOC PS 20, factory coated with exterior alkyd primer. 1. Grade A western red cedar; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Bevel Siding: S1S2E, actual overall dimensions of 5.1/2 by 11/16 inch (140 by 17 mm), measured on the face and thick edge at 19 percent moisture content. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades: 1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA. 2. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,tupelo, or yellow poplar. 3. Patterns:As indicated from Copper Beech standard profiles . 2.6 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Shelving: 3/4-inch medium-density fiberboard or hardwood plywood shelving with solid-wood front edge or boards of same species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, •m and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. .� 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace columns that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Columns: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the .� following: 1. Hardiboard Planks: a. James Hardie Products, Inc. 2. Ornamental Wood Columns: a. Hartmann Sanders. b. Schwerd,A. F. Manufacturing Co. C. Somerset Door& Column Company. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS '! ! A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. eiw 1.2 SUMMARY 40 A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Exterior siding. 3. Exterior soffits. 4. Interior standing and running trim. 5. Shelving and clothes rods. 6. Ornamental wood columns. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view and framing exposed to view. 2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for exterior woodwork fabricated to match existing profiles. 3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork fabricated to match existing profiles. 4. Division 9 Section"Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. w 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1 .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA !V inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual)depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 ow to 12 feet(3 to 3.6 m) in width. 3.6 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION am A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements im specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal MW hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. am C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. .. 3.7 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA ., Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Sheathing: .■ a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm) apart at edges and ends. "w 2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. an 3.8 BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION A. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; .. fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with fl inch (102-mm) overlap. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-8 w. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 24 inches (6 10 mm)o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Veneer Plaster Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm !" actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches(406 mm) o.c. 3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not splice structural members between supports. C. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d (100-mm) nails spaced not less than 32 inches (812 mm) o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. 3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2- inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal plate at floor levels of partitions, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. Attach to wall clips set in masonry. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4- inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches(1200 mm) and less in width, 6- ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7 OR am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .s B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. C. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-0 1that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching *' other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. 3. Chapter 23, Massachusetts State Building Code. 4. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2. Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch(19 mm). 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire- retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM. F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M). so G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM. B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5 t no Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA MW E. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir-larch(north); NLGA. aw 2. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 4. Southern pine; SPIB. „o 5. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER WK A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. ,,.. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north), Standard or 3 Common grade; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Standard or 3 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade, NELMA. .� 5. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. ow 2.5 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. so 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). .. B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. am ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 am on Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Copper bis(dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). in b. Ammoniacal copper citrate(CC). C. Copper aaole,Type A(CBA-A). ,o 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases,blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER on A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 4. Northern species; NLGA. C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: Construction or No. 2 the following species: 1. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. 2. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 4. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 5. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. D. Ceiling Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir-larch (north);NLGA. 2. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 4. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 5. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. +w ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 aw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. aw B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING w" A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Wood Structural Panels: am L Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness .P indicated. 3. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. am 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX). ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 on Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College e Northampton, MA SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY w PART 1 -GENERAL a 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. �s 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Sheathing. 5. Plywood backing panels. 6. Building wrap. B. Related Sections include the following: on 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA +�+ 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Anchor steel posts to steel with flanges, angle or floor type as required by conditions, welded to **r posts and bolted to metal supporting members. 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1.1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. • 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove and replace handrails and railings that do not comply with specified requirements, unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and will comply with specified requirements. 3.7 CLEANING .R A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. .. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05720 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College 0 Northampton, MA B. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. l," for shop w painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Stripe paint edges, corners, crevices,bolts, and welds. W C. Painted Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section"Painting." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. ,o 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet(5 mm in 3 m). C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of handrails and railings. on B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in shop or in field. ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-5 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect handrail and railing members to other construction. am E. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railings to concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and .w railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. F. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. G. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. J. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. op 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for .o recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary am protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ow acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize !w contrast. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 8W A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum am requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed handrails and railings: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." no ow ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-4 S Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other Work, unless otherwise indicated. C. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Chemical anchors. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Assemble handrails and railings in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: 1. As detailed. C. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. ew ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-3 4W Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA �.► 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish Setting Drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. aw PART 2 -PRODUCTS 1W 2.1 METALS A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Steel and Iron: Comply with the following requirements for each form required: .� 1. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing, ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless another grade is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Steel Rails and Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Iron Castings: Malleable iron complying with ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010). C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide cast brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. .F ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 05720-ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel and iron ornamental handrails and railings. No B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section"Metal Stairs" for handrails and railings associated with metal stairs. 2. Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood handrails and railings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For manufacturer's product lines of handrails and railings assembled from standard components. 1. Include Product Data for grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1.4 STORAGE A. Store handrails and railings in a dry,well-ventilated,weathertight place. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS qM A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings without ew field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720- 1 IN am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA MW B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after . fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: "' 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. so 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. ss► 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and ow abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." END OF SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS 05511 -6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural-steel channels, plates, or a combination of both, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural-steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members. Bolt or weld headers to stringers; bolt or weld framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 1. Conform to profiles and detailing of existing stairs. 2. Field modify existing stairs to receive new stairs to produce continuous and uniform installation matching existing work. B. Metal Risers, Subtread Pans, and Subplatforms: Form to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness necessary to support indicated loads,but not less than 0.0677 inch(1.7 mm). 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 2.7 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM'S "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. we C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of metal stair components, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. METAL STAIRS 05511 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- .� Place Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi(27 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated. w. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, handrails, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. .. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly s„ mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed .. surfaces. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. .w Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. w. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent .. surface. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. METAL STAIRS 05511 -4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless another grade is required by design loads. W F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads. W G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. �w 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);with hex nuts,ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and,where indicated, flat washers. C. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3 (ASME B 18.6.7M). D. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel,ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to Op normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. in METAL STAIRS 05511 -3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA • 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance' Article to ■. demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE `°' A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for metal stairs specified in this Section to be fabricated and installed by the same firm. •w B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 1e C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D L I, "Structural Welding Code- Steel," and AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." .. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Do not use steel sheet with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. METAL STAIRS 05511 -2 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 05511 -METAL STAIRS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Handrails and Railings" for ornamental metal handrails and railings fabricated from stock components. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component of metal stairs. 1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.19 kN/sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 lbf(1.33 kN) on an area of 4 sq. in. (25.8 sq. cm),whichever produces the greater stress. 2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above in addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads. 3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm),whichever is less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal stairs. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal stairs and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. METAL STAIRS 05511 - 1 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA MW B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." am END OF SECTION 05500 .w ap am M .W METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-8 IM w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop " painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm) dry film thickness. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7 No Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .■ A. Fabricate steel door frames from structural shapes and tubing of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. am B. Secure door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry with machine screws in expansion anchors. Provide 3 anchors per jamb. MW 2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for .. recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized .. finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges. am PART 3 -EXECUTION .W 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and am levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, "' masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6 0 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College IN Northampton, MA A. General: Fabricate ladder for elevator pit, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. 1. Comply with ASME Al7.1. B. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (10-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 16 inches (406 mm) apart. C. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch-(19-mm-)diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches(300 mm) o.c. D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails;plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.with welded on or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. to 2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. 2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 00 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate connections in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" and recommended detailing practices. C. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Furnish templates for anchors for members to be installed after concrete and masonry is placed. 2.11 STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. ., 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly .. and coordinated installation. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: .. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. am 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and .� space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. NM I. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners OR where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.7 STEEL LADDERS METAL_ FABRICATIONS 05500-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College OR Northampton, MA C. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor wir of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.3 PAINT * A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);with hex nuts,ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M); and,where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3 (ASME B 18.6.7M). w� E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B 18.21.2M). H. Chem-set Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.5 GROUT METAL FABRICATIONS 05500.3 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA •* 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those am indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: am 1. AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. , 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. on 1.2 SUMMARY 40 A. This Section includes the following: 1. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 2. Loose steel lintels. am 3. Steel ladders. 4. Support angles for elevator door sills. 5. Elevator machine beams. 6. Steel framing and supports. 7. Structural-steel door sub-frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs with metal pan, metal plate, or grating treads. 2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Handrails and Railings" for ornamental metal handrails and railings fabricated from stock components. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. F. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. B. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-5 A. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA +•� A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and .� quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of. square tolerance of 1/8 inch(3 mm). �.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL .. A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College �w Northampton, MA B. Built-up Members: Built-up members of manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel section, with stiffened flanges, nested into a U-shaped steel section joist track, with unstiffened flanges; unpunched; of web depths indicated; complying with ASTM C 955, and indicated. 2.4 CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched,with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch(1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing, members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi(230 MPa). w� B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. so 4. End clips. 5. Backer plates. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS,AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint:ASTM A 780. 2.8 FABRICATION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-3 WEI Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during •■ delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2- PRODUCTS Im 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. Allied American Studco, Inc. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. MarinoWare, Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 5. Unimast, Inc. 6. United Metal Products, Inc. w. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 33 (230) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; 50 (340), for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch(1.37 mm) and greater. 2. Coating: G60 (7_180). B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570/A 570M, hot rolled or ASTM A 611, cold rolled; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's baked-on, lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, of grade as follows: •• 1. Grade: 33 (230) or C, Type 1 or 2, for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; 40 (275) or D, Type 1 or 2, for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)and greater. 2.3 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch(1.37 mm). 1 Flange Width: 1.5/8 inches(41 mm), minimum. 3. Section Properties: As indicated COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 05400-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING w PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. w 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof rafter framing. 2. Ceiling joist framing. w B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing using wood-based structural-use panels. 2. Division 9 Section "Veneer Plaster" for interior non load bearing metal stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ,w A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold- formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming. B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has W resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following: 1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections." COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch(19 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm)apart. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (910 mm), and as follows: 1. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-)long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm),with end joints as follows: am 1. End Joints: Lapped. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting *" structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. E. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to .� provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. no 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field welds will be subject to inspection. "' B. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of exposed deck surfaces are included in this Section. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or �+ deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. No END OF SECTION 05310 5M a, STEEL DECK 05310-4 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA E. End Closures and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. F. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, [0.0598 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.0747 inch(1.90 mm)]thick,with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch(9.5-mm)minimum diameter. G. Repair Paint: Lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION STEEL DECK 05310-3 pill am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .w B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. w. 1.6 COORDINATION no PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering "` products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Deck: MR a. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc. b. United Steel Deck, Inc. .. C. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. 2.2 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI ®. Publication No. 29, the minimum section properties indicated, and the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 (275), G60 (Z180)zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 4. Side Laps: Overlapped. ..� 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self threading screws. C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 29 for overhang and slab depth. STEEL DECK 05310-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 05310-STEEL DECK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Noncomposite form deck. w B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel. 2. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous framing with steel shapes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck: similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in ' construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- """" Steel," and AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." C. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. STEEL DECK 05310- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College W Northampton, MA 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. s C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. W 3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING W A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. of B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent ww construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar w. fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner 'by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 11 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA +.. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. •�■ C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. 1. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 2. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches(200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES,AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm)beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip. 2. Install copper drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm)back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge. 3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside ear of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section"Firestopping." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: an 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-9 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA • B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, .� unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary .. from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed- joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch(3 mm). F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 rnm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142- inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. go 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. ' 2. Provide grout,with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143. +�w PART 3 - EXECUTION me 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. ' 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping -go connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths w„ indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of 7-oz./sq. ow ft. (2-kg/sq. m) sheet copper coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high- density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). 3. EPDM Flashing: Manufacturer's standard flashing product formed from a terpolymer of ethylene-propylene diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. +•� C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: .R 1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: a. Cop-R-Cote;Advanced Building Products, Inc. b. H & B C-Coat Flashing; Hohmann& Barnard, Inc. C. Coated Copper Flashing, Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Copperseal; York Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: a. Dur-O-Barrier; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Textroflash; Hohmann& Barnard, Inc. C. Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. d. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. e. Everlastic MF-40;Williams Products, Inc. 3. EPDM Flashing: a. FlashGuard; Firestone Building Products. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA G. Water: Potable. 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60(Grade 400). 2.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: !! 1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 2. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (2180), commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot- dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Chemical anchors. 2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition(mild). 3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed. 4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without ! " failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .� 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: „,w 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1500 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 8 inches (203 mm) nominal; 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) actual. 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive ..p strength of 2500 psi(17.3 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions: .� a. Modular: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm)wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm)long. 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. ■ 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. r. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16(1.18-mm)sieve. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such w masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills,ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. e D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. WX PART 2-PRODUCTS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA �•+ A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Accessories embedded in the masonry. a.. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in"Quality Assurance"Article. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. *' a. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. a, 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. ow B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component No and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those ow of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. r„ 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-2 .sr Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL �s 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Concrete brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: ! C. Products installed,but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications." 2. Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 Section "Steel go Doors and Frames." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f m) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: f m=1500psi. 1.5 SUBMITTALS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 1 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa). .. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project .w identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: At Contractor's expense, testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or .� other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 16 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. ,A 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm;) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 'W E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architects approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. ' ! 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. so 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. + 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 15 no Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 00 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. so B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. am 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS ow A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. am C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and so other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than am 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching no mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and 09 standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than am surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. am D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 60 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or ow that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. WWI 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. M 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's am CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 14 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. C. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. D. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: E. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 13 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. , B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch(3 mm) in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS ..� A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by .s hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). so CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 12 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College 0 Northampton, MA B. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches; (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low ` temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or 40 chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300. 11 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA we 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. we 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 14/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. .W 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or Im partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. �** 1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves. .� 3.7 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. .ea 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations e indicated or as approved by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 a. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm). D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations ` and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. *p' H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. we I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. No J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. we 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS .M A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through- , wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams,walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ON Northampton, MA 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 mm). F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water permeability. G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist. H. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: "a 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch-(25-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch-(19-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 40 I. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. ear J. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride for concrete placed on metal decking. K. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water- cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. an PART 3 -EXECUTION OR 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ON A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. No 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS .. A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as .A recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXES Im A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: am 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. an B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: W 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm) if consolidation is by vibration. 3. Maximum Slump: 5 inches(125 mm) of consolidation is by other methods. D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 5401b/cu.yd. (320 kg/cu. m). 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). E. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1, Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. b. Conseal CS-231; Concrete Sealants Inc. C. Swellseal Joint; De Neef Construction Chemicals(U.S.)Inc. d. Hydrotite; Greenstreak. e. Mirastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate(USA), Inc. f. Superstop; Progress Unlimited Inc. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick: 1. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils (0.18 mm)thick. +► 2. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into the Work includes,but is not limited to, "Moistop 2" by Sisalkraft or Ply- Bar Plus by Glaskraft. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75- mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. C. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: a. Titan Hard; Burke Group, LLC (The). b. Euco Diamond Hard; Euclid Chemical Co. C. Seal Hard; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Vexcon Starseal PS;Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. 2.9 CURING MATERIALS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA o. A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: Ow 1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch(19 mm). C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. Ow 2.5 ADMIXTURES .. A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. �. 1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb. 2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb. 2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Rubber Waterstops: a. Greenstreak. b. Progress Unlimited Inc. C. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc. 2. PVC Waterstops: a. Greenstreak. b. Progress Unlimited Inc. C. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc. D. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave not corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. on 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 ON Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Waterstops. am 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. o, 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Epoxy joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips. .. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. •� C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1.4, "Structural Welding Code-- Reinforcing Steel." E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." ww 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. .. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS * A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section"Cement Concrete Pavement' for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. 40 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 4e B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. *" 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared ow according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete.structures. on D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: so 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. go CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 4. Compact nonreinforced soil fill to comply with Division 2 Section"Earthwork." C. Place filter fabric against back of wall and place layer of drainage fill at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep behind filter fabric to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade. Place another layer of filter fabric between drainage fill and soil fill. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: For bed-joint lines along walls, do not exceed 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32 mm in 3 m), 3 inches (75 mm)maximum. * B. Variation from Indicated Batter: For slope of wall face, do not vary from indicated slope by more than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet(32 mm in 3 m). C. Variation from Indicated Wall Line: For walls indicated as straight, do not vary from straight line by more than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet(32 mm in 3 m). mm 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace segmental retaining wall construction of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Segmental retaining walls that do not match approved Samples. 3. Segmental retaining walls that do not comply with other requirements indicated.. B. Replace units so segmental retaining wall matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION 02832 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832 -5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Form corners and ends by using special units or splitting units with mason's hammer and chisel. B. Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 1. At Contractors option, unreinforced lean concrete may be substituted for upper 1 to 2 .� inches (25 to 50 mm)of base. Compact and screed concrete to a smooth, level surface. C. First Course: Place first course of segmental retaining wall units on leveling base/course for full ' length of wall. Place units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level. 1. Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane. 2. Place and compact fill, either drainage or soil fill as indicated, to top of first course. Place fill on both sides of wall at same time without disturbing alignment of units. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. D. Subsequent Courses: Remove excess fill and debris from tops of units in course below. Place units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below. „a 1. For units with lugs designed to fit into holes in adjacent units, lay units so lugs are accurately aligned with holes, and bedding surfaces are firmly seated on beds of units below. 2. For units with lips at front of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm contact with lips of units below. 3. For units with pins, install pins and align units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. E. Cap Units: Place cap units and secure with cap adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. wr 3.3 FILL PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork," NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide," and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions. B. Place, spread, and compact fill in uniform lifts for full width and length of embankment as wall is laid. Begin at back of wall and place and spread fill toward embankment. 1. Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 48 inches (1200 mm) of wall, or one-half of height above bottom of wall,whichever is greater. 2. Protect root structure of existing tree and do not use compaction equipment around root structures. 3. Compact drainage fill to not less than 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. so SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832 -4 am ■ Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Shapes: Provide units of basic shape and dimensions indicated with machine-split textured exposed faces. D. Shapes: Provide units of any basic shape and dimensions that will produce segmental retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated without interfering with other elements of the Work and as follows: 1. Exposed Face: Machine-split textured, shaped face with deeply beveled vertical edges. 2. Batter: Provide units that offset from course below to provide 1:8 batter. E. Cap Units: Provide cap units of same shape as other units with smooth, as-cast top surfaces without holes or lugs. F. Special Units: Provide corner units, end units, and other shapes as needed to produce segmental retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated and to provide texture on exposed surfaces matching face. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Pins: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units provided, made from nondegrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers. B. Cap Adhesive: Product supplied or recommended by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for adhering cap units to units below. C. Leveling Base: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for drainage fill. D. Nonreinforced Soil Fill: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for satisfactory soils. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for excavation tolerances, condition of subgrades, and other conditions affecting performance of segmental retaining walls. 40 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION A. General: Place units according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide" and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions. Lay units in running bond. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832 -3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Include test data for freeze-thaw durability of segmental retaining wall units. G. Product Certificates: For segmental retaining wall units, signed by product manufacturer. 1. Include test data for shear strength between segmental retaining wall units according to NCMA SRWU-2. 2. Include test data for connection strength between segmental retaining wall units and soil reinforcement according to NCMA SRWU-l. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For segmental retaining wall units and soil reinforcement. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store and handle concrete units and accessories to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, breaking, chipping, or other causes. B. Store geosynthetics in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact. Store on elevated platforms, protected from moisture, sunlight, chemicals, flames, temperatures above 160 deg F (71 deg C) or below 32 deg F (0 deg C), and other conditions that might damage them. Verify identification of geosynthetics before using and examine them for defects as material is placed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Segmental Retaining Wall Units: ww a. Licensees of Anchor Wall Systems, Inc. b. Licensees of Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, Inc. C. Licensees of Rockwood Retaining Wall Systems. d. Licensees of Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. e. Licensees of Versa-Lok Retaining Wall Systems; a division of Kiltie Corp. 2.2 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS A. Concrete Units: ASTM C 1372, Normal Weight, except that units shall not differ in height more than plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) from specified dimension. 1. Provide units that comply with requirements for freeze-thaw durability. 2. Provide units that interlock with courses above and below by means of integral lugs or lips or pins. aw B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. ow SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832 -2 ■ Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 02832-SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS w PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes single-depth segmental retaining walls with soil reinforcement. B. Related Sections include the following: no 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for excavation for segmental retaining walls. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide segmental retaining walls capable of withstanding the effects of ew gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades indicated, and determined according to NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls." ,R B. Drainage: Provide segmental retaining wall drainage system capable of preventing accumulation of groundwater in retained soils and in retaining wall foundation soils. on 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For installed systems indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For concrete units. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and texture of concrete unit required. Submit sections of units not less than 3 inches (75 mm)square. ,M D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Preconstruction Test Reports: For segmental retaining wall system. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for segmental retaining wall units. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 02832 - 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. W END OF SECTION 02751 e on CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -9 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: L Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the .. following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch(6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch(9 mm), minus 1/4 inch(6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Joint Spacing: 3 inches(75 mm). 7. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 8. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -8 M Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College M Northampton, MA H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in W final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. 1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments. J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during spreeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power- driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished am concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -7 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .� 2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one- half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete .. surfaces. a. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm). ! E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm). am 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 4W A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, w. transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, nodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -6 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September. 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to 1W required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. so B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. w B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously place joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -5 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method. 1. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency. C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 3 inches(75 mm). D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals. E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent: 1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch(19-mm) maximum aggregate. F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.9 kg/cu. m). 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -4 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded, from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch(19 mm) nominal. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling. D. Water: ASTM C 94. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E. 2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116,Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 e mm) long. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Fibrillated Fibers: w a. Fibrasol F;Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Technologies. C. Grace Fibers;W. R. Grace& Co., Construction Products Div. 2. Monofilament Fibers: a. Fibrasol IIP;Axim Concrete Technologies. ? ! b. Fiberstrand 100; Euclid Chemical Co. C. Fibermix Stealth; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -3 w no Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source. ow D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. no 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other .o construction activities. am PART 2 - PRODUCTS No 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials ow to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet(30.5 m) or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete .�. surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT .. A. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. B. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed. WA C. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars,welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber- reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will *^' not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 02751-CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. so 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Walkways. am B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 2. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances eu warrant adjustments. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in ± construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ■� D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils(0.4 mm). am 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL no A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. MP 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. ow B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. no C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. am D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. E. Remove: and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements no indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. .. 3.11 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and am legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site. ■• END OF SECTION 02741 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -8 s Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot- mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted. 1. Average Density: 96 percent. w D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. 0M F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch(6 mm), no minus. ON B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch(6 mm. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. t C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA •� 1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F(121 deg Q. +■• 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.6 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints as described in Al MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive .. displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 3.7 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F(85 deg Q. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and .� outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -6 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch(25 mm) in existing pavements. 1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm)thick. B. Crack and joint Filling: 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended. rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted- aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose. C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq.yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum. 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -5 on Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA aw C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952,with drying time of less than[3] [45] minutes. an 1. Color: As indicated. 2.4 MIXES no A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in Al MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Base Course: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section M3.11.03, Table A, Dense Binder Course. 2. Surface Course: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section M3.11.03, Table A, Dense Mix. Im PART 3 - EXECUTION MR 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. ,. B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PATCHING A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove .w spillages and clean affected surfaces. C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 4W 3.3 REPAIRS .w HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -4 �r Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September. 12, 2001 Smith College ■ Northampton, MA B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 50 deg F us (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F(35 deg Q. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured, crushed blast-furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 107, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, properly cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert maternal. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration- graded material. B. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-70 or MC-250 for open textured bases. C. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with DOT requirements. D. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. E. Water: Potable. F. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141,pumping consistency. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. B. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. w HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA • 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. „ 1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department, "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges", latest edition and Addenda. C. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AIMS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt. 2. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. „R 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.5 deg C). 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.5 deg C) at time of placement. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -2 M Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 02741-HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. 4. Pavement-marking paint. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. w 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. aM B. DOT: Department of Transportation. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of standard specifications of state or local DOT. ? 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. C. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 , 1 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ■ Northampton, MA 1. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. C. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 2. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 3. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 3. Submit separate reports for each test. 4. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. END OF SECTION 02630 gr as STORM DRAINAGE 02630-9 no Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA op A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.11 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION MW A. Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install system and backfill according to chamber MR manufacturer's written instructions. Include storage and leaching chambers, filtering material, and filter mat. 4W 3.12 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as '" nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work. B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of sm existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi(20.7 MPa). ,o C. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. ow 3.13 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ow A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: No 1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch-(200-mm-) thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable "" methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below: .. 1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section"Earthwork." .m 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL am A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. No 2. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated. B. ABS Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. 2. Install according to ASTM D 2321. C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM. D 232 1. 2. Install according to ASTM D 2321. .� D. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated. E. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions. 3.7 CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R. 3.9 DRY-WELL INSTALLATION A. Excavate hole to diameter of at least 6 inches (150 mm)greater than outside of dry well. Do not extend excavation into ground-water table. B. Install precast, concrete-ring dry wells according to the following: 1. Assemble rings to depth indicated. 2. Extend rings to height where top of cover will be approximately 8 inches (200 mm) below finished grade. 3. Backfill bottom of inside of rings with filtering material to level at least 12 inches(300 mm) above bottom. 4. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into rings and terminate into side of tee fitting. 5. Backfill around outside of rings with filtering material to top level of rings. 6. Install cover over top of rings. 3.10 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION STORM DRAINAGE 02630-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following: 1. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN100 and DN150): ABS, SDR35, sewer pipe and fittings; solvent- cemented joints; or gaskets and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented joints, or gaskets and gasketed joints. 3.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is .� specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods. 1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications: a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD. b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes. C. Bushing type to join piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 3.5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and .� arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. MW C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless .� otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping with 36-inch (1000-mm) minimum cover. F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. so 3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION no STORM DRAINAGE 02630-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed steel. ■ C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel,welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed steel. 2.9 DRY WELLS A. Description: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced, perforated concrete rings. Include the following: 1. Floor: Cast-in-place concrete. 2. Cover: Liftoff-type concrete cover with cast-in lift rings. 3. Wall Thickness: 4 inches (100 mm) minimum with 1-inch (25-mm) diameter or 1-by-3- inch- (25-by-75-mm-) maximum slotted perforations arranged in rows parallel to axis of ring. go a. Total Free Area of Perforations: Approximately 15 percent of ring interior surface. b. Ring Construction: Designed to be self-aligning. 4. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2-1/2-inch (19- to 63-mrn) washed, crushed stone or gravel. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. 1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, unless watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA N. 2.6 MANHOLES A. Normal-Traffic, Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced .�. concrete, of depth indicated,with provision for rubber gasketed joints. 1. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base .d section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 5. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 229- mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch-(610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 6. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. B. Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for standard-duty service. Include 20-inch (610-mm) ID by 4-to 5-inch (178-to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch-(660-mm-)diameter flat solid, gasketed lid. 1. Products: Neenah R-1915-S;water-resistant frame, gasket and bolted lid. .� 2.7 STORMWATER INLETS .M A. Combination Inlets: Vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions .� indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. B. Frames and Grates: Dimensions, opening pattern, free area, and other attributes indicated. 1. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 minimum, ductile-iron casting. 2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318,ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150,Type II. .W 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water- cementitious ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel,welded wire fabric, plain. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College w Northampton, MA B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following: 1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. a. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints. 1. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M),rubber. 2. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564,rubber. 3. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 4. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. 5. Bands: Stainless steel,at least one at each pipe insert. B. Bushing-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric bushing fabricated to mate with OD of smaller pipe and ID of adjoining larger pipe, for nonpressure joints. 1. Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2. Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. 2.5 CATCH BASINS A. Normal-Traffic, Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,with provision for rubber gasketed joints. 1. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and !o lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 5. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 229- mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch-(610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 6. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for heavy-duty service. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate with small square or short- slotted drainage openings. 1. Products: Neenah R-2501; Frame and Grate. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. A. Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless �* permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Im PART 2-PRODUCTS 4W 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 1W products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Stormwater Disposal Systems: a. Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. b. Cultec, Inc. C. Hancor, Inc. d. Infiltrator Systems, Inc. e. PSA, Inc. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. 1. Wall Thickness for NPS 3 to NPS 6(DN80 to DN150): SDR 35. 2. Wall Thickness for NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN200 to DN300): SDR 42. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. STORM DRAINAGE 02630-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College s Northampton, MA SECTION 02630-STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY W, A. This Section includes storm drainage outside the building including: 1. Storm water piping. 2. Leach pits. 3. Catch Basins 4. Utility Manholes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for excavation and backfill. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. so 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pre-cast dry wells/leach pits. 2. Stormwater disposal systems. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following: 1. Precast concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers, and grates. C. Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete. D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING STORM DRAINAGE 02630- 1 ■ Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet(30 m) or less of wall length,but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet(46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. rw B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. OR 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS "M A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02300- 11 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. 5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place .� materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm)thick when compacted. D. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in equal layers,with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 MM) thick when compacted. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with *■ subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. .. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved No by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following .A locations and frequencies: M EARTHWORK 02300. 10 ■ Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College s Northampton, MA A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch(13 mm). C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm)when tested with a 10-foot(3-m) straightedge. 3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems." B. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as indicated. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on drainage fabric to support drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material and wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches(150 mm). C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches(150 mm). 40 1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698. 2. Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final subgrade. 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, me overlapping sides and ends. B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric according to fabric manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: on C. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: M, 1. Place base course material over subbase. EARTHWORK 02300-9 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: MW 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL , A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. am 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. .,. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below .� subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. 3.16 GRADING EARTHWORK 02300-8 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College M Northampton, MA 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL �e A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly,but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. w B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm)below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches(300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of eat utility system. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm)below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.13 FILL EARTHWORK 02300-7 no Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA MW B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. ow 1. Clearance: 12 inches(300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of up pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE ., A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract «� provisions for changes in the Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. EARTHWORK 02300-6 .P N Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. �s 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. to 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. EARTHWORK 02300-5 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA I I. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8(2.36-mm)sieve. ow J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand, ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm)sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4(4.75-mm)sieve. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. B. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf(490 N);ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf(178 N);ASTM D 4533. " 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf(222 N);ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft. (100 L/s per sq. m);ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50(0.3 mm);ASTM D 4751. PART 3 -EXECUTION ., 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork .� operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. EARTHWORK 02300-4 go Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College qM Northampton, MA A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility MR services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CI-I, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. H. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)sieve. EARTHWORK 02300-3 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA o E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. .. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet(3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated w dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm). 1. Rock materials are not anticipated to be encountered for this Project. Should ledge, outcroppings or boulders in excess of 3/4 cu. yd. be encountered, then excavation will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. no 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ow A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. NM B. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS EARTHWORK 02300-2 W Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 02300-EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ear, A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade,walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. PF 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." 2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. 3. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and plantings. 4. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. EARTHWORK 02300- 1 10 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as directed by Owner. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs,gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02230-5 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 00 3.3 UTILITIES A. Arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site ow clearing. 1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site ,W clearing. B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. w. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary MP utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission. D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. ..w 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. «* 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. « 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with w underlying subsoil or other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. SITE CLEARING 02230-4 .ww Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION in A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water w runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. go D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of remaining trees. am 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees. B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. No C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. I. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located and approved by the Owner, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist. SITE CLEARING 02230-3 dw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1 A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. .w 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, 40 adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings according to Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. aw 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in „„ Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .w A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. ow 1. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. go 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. we B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. No C. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) so 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. SITE CLEARING 02230-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 02230-SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS q" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. wi 1.2 SUMMARY ,m A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. 5. Removing above-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Appendix A of the Supplementary Conditions for"Tree and Shrub Protection". 2. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering' for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations. 4. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures ► undergoing alterations. 5. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 6. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing r� topsoil for lawns and planting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. on 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP SITE CLEARING 02230- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 go on ON CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA *� 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. ®' 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. tn. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. .� P. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. on 1.8 WARRANTIES on A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280- mm) paper. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. w PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ?! A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING e A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-5 aw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Projects Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. , 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and e. equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data,where applicable. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. "W 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and no maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: OW a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: MW a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ?!� Northampton, MA 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST) ear A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: on a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architects reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings on site at all times. Make notations as the work progresses. Maintain record of changes, deviations or adjustments on site documents. Transcribe field notes to clean blue-or black-line prints to form Record Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up �w Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA **� 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. .. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled .A requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. w� 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 1 Submit certified copy of Architects Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES we PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY am A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. am 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. 'w B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. on 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 1 or Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA IM coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. am a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION 01731 .M MW CUTTING AND PATC14ING 01731 -4 .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College +! Northampton, MA C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. ! 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3 .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or •• safety. 1. Membranes and flashings. 2. Piping, ductwork,vessels, and equipment. no D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or .R in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architects opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ow 2.1 MATERIALS 4W A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use ,R materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, 00 will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION no 3.1 EXAMINATION .W A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. Wr 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. an 1.2 SUMMARY in A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: sM 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. wo a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS W" A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. on B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. wo 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-protection systems. 3. Control systems. rn 4. Communication systems. 5. Electrical wiring systems. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 4w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA END OF SECTION 01500 .rs M TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 11 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. I. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. am 1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served,with sign mounted above. a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. .� 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place " into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and +. abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from .� damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. "W 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent .w paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that am might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during MW construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." am TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 10 .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College an Northampton, MA C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. 1. Comply fully with requirements of Appendix A of the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Engage licensed arborist acceptable to the Owner to evaluate and develop protective measures to be employed during construction. 3. Coordinate removal and transplant operations with the Owner's personnel. D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install portable chain-link enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Set fence posts in concrete bases. 2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and use other construction operations. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially OR completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. W F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide n lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with r load-bearing,wood-framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials. H. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8-inch (16-mm)gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side. 2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. nw TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-9 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials. G. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open .. shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site. 1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood. ' 2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Elevator Usage: Temporary use of new elevators is not permitted. J. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. .. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms ■* near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. No .. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-8 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College an Northampton, MA 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use n permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving." C. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Install signs to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 2. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. 3. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. 1. Install dedicated breakers for temporary power at service panel. Remove when project is complete. I. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and when the Work is being performed. K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate ,. telephone line for facsimile machine. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architects office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendents use in making and receiving telephone calls. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. Do not obstruct or block access to site or facilities occupied by the Owner TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Maintain temporary drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. w. 1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site. 2. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a splash or drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. ! 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. 3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. 4. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than two stories vertically or 200 feet(60 m)horizontally to facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. • G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply. E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having ®, jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed. F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset .m button, and pilot light. G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for go surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. am PART 3-EXECUTION so 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. no 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION RM A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service with matching, compatible materials and equipment. .. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. 3. Maintain existing services and make connections in a manner that will not disrupt existing utilities due to construction related loads. B. Drainage: Provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 on Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College +m Northampton, MA A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time,when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 10 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service w during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS e 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 Section"Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving." +�r C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet(1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60- mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-(73-mm-)OD corner and pull posts,with 1-5/8-inch-(42-mm- ) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. D. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. E. Water: Potable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Appendix A of Supplementary Conditions for"Tree and Shrub Protection Specifications." 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of ** implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt .� paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. ., 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES .R. A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and 4W facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without payment of use charges. C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .. A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's"Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. on B. Temporary utilities include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Ventilation. 5. Electric power service. ax 6. Lighting. 7. Telephone service. on C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary roads and paving. !!► 2. Dewatering facilities and drains. 3. Waste disposal facilities. 4. Storage and fabrication sheds. 5. Lifts and hoists. 6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. 7. Staging D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Pest control. 5. Site enclosure fence. 6. Security enclosure and lockup. 7. Barricades,warning signs, and lights. 8. Temporary enclosures. 9. Temporary partitions. 10. Fire protection. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College + _ Northampton, MA 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within twenty-one days of date established for commencement of the Work. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-5 .. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. ow 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. .m B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing .w agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in 00 writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires am testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. MW 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative .. to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- wo control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. .� 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar •� quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College e Northampton, MA 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the on system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-3 MP Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA MW where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation, they are not Samples. .w D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. OF 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design Ow professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. MW 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. ON 1.5 SUBMITTALS .m A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: so 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. am 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. w* 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. am D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 MR Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 1 OF Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College + Northampton, MA 1. No Exceptions Taken: Submittal is consistent with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Make Corrections Noted: Submittal is consistent with requirements of Contract Documents with notations as indicated. „ 3. Not Approved: Submittal is not consistent with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Revise & Resubmit: Make corrections noted and/or provide submittal consistent with Contract Documents. D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-9 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA O. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. P. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of �. coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Q. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction ` Progress Documentation." R. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. w. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Review and action by Architect does not release Contractor from requirements of Contract Documents. C. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and,where required, is authorized for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. J. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with a requirements. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by as manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures." M. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. N. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a "! product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. +�* a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures." 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, retain one copy with record documents unless otherwise indicated. Architect wilt not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by 36 inches (600 by 900 mm). 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: wo a. Initial Submittal: Submit two blue- or black-line prints. Architect will return one print. b. Final Submittal: Submit five blue- or black-line prints. Architect will retain two 40 prints; remainder will be returned. Retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing. ,o D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architects sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. 4. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. C. Availability. d. Delivery time. 5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that 4" illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 6. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one submittal with options selected. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. Deliver with project manuals to Owner upon Project Close-out. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. .. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. sit b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. ow e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. aw h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 1. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. in. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base *� Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. L Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 a Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal W may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to Architect in addition to specified number of copies to ," concurrent reviewer. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. ON Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant an information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. w� b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Specification Section and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS .�r 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. SUBMITTAL.PROCEDURES 01330-3 aw Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so ow processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. am a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. ow C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. am D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architects receipt of submittal. .. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. MR 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architects consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. ow 3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architects consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal and submittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before Im being returned to Contractor. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow seven days for processing each resubmittal. 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. .. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: ~` a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. L. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. �•* i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Other necessary identification. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College +p Northampton, MA SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES on PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 40 A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and an reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and construction photographs. 4. Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1 .R Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA am A. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. ow B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take color photographs weekly. Select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. MW 1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Architect and Owner. m 2. Document changes in scope, concealed conditions and progress of the Work. am END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. S. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.5 REPORTS A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, notify Architect and photograph conditions. Submit a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect ' actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-7 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for the duration of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram. 1. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting " progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 2. Use"one workday" as the unit of time. C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: .� a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Purchase of materials. C. Delivery. d. Fabrication. e. Installation. 2. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical .� path. D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float' sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 40 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. "■' 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. •.• 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). .�. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College ! Northampton, MA 3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: 4" a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Uninterruptible services. C. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Submittals. b. Purchases. C. Mockups. d. Fabrication. e. Sample testing. w f. Deliveries. g. Installation. h. Tests and inspections. i. Adjusting. j. Curing. k. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 6. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but Rw not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 40 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA .. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. ow 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & aw Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of 4W Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an ON early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 10 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architects administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Format: 4-by-6-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade stock, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. C. Name of Architect. on d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. G. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE *M A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractors Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, interim milestones and Owner occupancy. 2. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 3. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 4. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 5. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 6. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. so 7. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 8. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of RM construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, in Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3 op am I Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the following activity. 2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. .A 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to "W demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include schedule of sub-contactors from approved list attached and sub-contactors proposed by Contractor where Owner's list has no preferences. ow B. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: .W 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). �. 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. ■* C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies. D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print; large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. I-. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. F. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of �. taking photographs. Document progress of the work and any concealed conditions or changes in scope due to field conditions. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2 MR Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Field condition reports. 6. Construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 4M A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. a 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 15) Coordination among various sub-trades and operations. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 IN I ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Possible conflicts. h. Compatibility problems. L Time schedules. j. Weather limitations. k. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Warranty requirements. 4W m. Compatibility of materials. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Temporary facilities and controls. P. Space and access limitations. q. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. r. Testing and inspecting requirements. S. Required performance results. t. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. ..� PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is or required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. on 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. ow B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures. L Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 1. Parking availability. M. Office,work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. P. Security. q. Progress cleaning. r. Working hours. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. ww 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts .R and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy,water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. „■, 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination: Schedule Coordination Meetings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. • 1. Post copies of list in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01310-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination Drawings. go 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. ALA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." .. 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Review copy: Submit proposed application for review by Architect and Owner one week prior to submitting notorized application. awi E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction *� Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 40 F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien on and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate go information about application. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractors principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 9. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. .,., b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. ow C. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. �.. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 w Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College In Northampton, MA SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: I'm a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. on 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA "" 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. am 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Change Directive: Architect may issue a Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Change Directive may contain a complete description of change in the Work or reference a Proposal Request. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) am PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) no END OF SECTION 01250 Wo .w am CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 �e. Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL on 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS `m A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. OR 1.2 SUMMARY on A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 4M 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. ass 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them we instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within seven (7) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. eeA a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 40 b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 40 B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 00 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1 .w, Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA MW PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) 4W PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES am A. Alternate No. 1: Paint existing steeple. no B. Alternate No. 2: Site improvements as indicated on Drawing L1.1 C. Alternate No. 3: Add top coat of bituminous to existing entry drive. ow D. Alternate No. 4: Provide granite curbs in lieu of asphalt curbs in Alternate 1. E. Alternate No. 5: Add VCT, Carpet and Sheet Goods as indicated on Drawings. F. Alternate No. 6: Remove existing and install new light fixtures, exit devices and emergency lighting as indicated on Drawings. G. Alternate No. 7: Add hold open devices to doors from chapel to rear stairs (4 locations). H. Alternate No. 8: Add 1/z" square galvanized hardware cloth to all areaway gratings. END OF SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES 01230-2 40 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College go Northampton, MA SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. �w 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the ! " Contract Sum. e 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES 01230- 1 am Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. way PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140-2 ,w 4W Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01140-WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. a. Phase work to maintain access at all times. Maintain current number of parking spaces by providing new parking areas before taking other parking areas and entrances over of mobilization and on-site activities. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. C. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner on occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140- 1 MR Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College No Northampton, MA be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Occupancy of the Facility: The building will be in use continuously during the construction period. In addition, the site includes access to parking used by staff that work within the building and students who reside in adjacent facilities. Finally, the building is used by the community as a public place and access must be maintained and utmost courtesy extended throughout the entire construction period to accommodate the day to day activities of the facility during the course of construction. B. Sequencing of the Work: The Contractor shall be responsible for the scheduling and sequencing of the work phases to allow continuous use of the facility and access to the site for staff and student residents. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Suspension of Work: When use of the facility for services and programs will be disrupted by construction activities the Contractor will be responsible for cleaning, securing access to construction areas and other provisions including suspension of on-site operations as necessary to allow full use of the facility with minimal disruption and inconvenience to the public and staff. Scheduled events will be given to the Contractor for development of the Construction Schedule and events not known, but subsequently scheduled will be accommodated as necessary. The Contractor's performance in this regard is of utmost importance. END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100-3 .A Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ow a. To be completed prior to excavation for new addition. 2. Phase 2: Elevator addition and interior improvements. a. To be completed within 20 weeks from notice to proceed. 3. Phase 3: Site work in rear of building and final paving. a. To be completed as weather permits within project schedule either this fall or early spring. .W 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations, including "" limited use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited by Owner's right to occupy the building and site, schedule useof the facilities and perform work or to retain other contractors for portions of Project. am L6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS ow A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before so work under this Contract begins. The separate contract includes the following: 1. Abatement of Hazardous Materials: A separate contract will be awarded for abatement of asbestos related to piping, vinyl asbestos tile and transite board within the existing building. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16- +� division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the , Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall SUMMARY 01100-2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA SECTION 01100-SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS w A. Project Identification: Project consists of installation of new elevator in a two-story addition and site improvements to Helen Hills Hills Chapel. 1. Project Location: Round Hill Road and Elm Street, Northampton, MA. 2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated September 12, 2001, were prepared for Project by Kuhn Riddle Architects. C. Project Coordinator: Barbara Spalding has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project Coordinator. D. The Work consists of addition to existing wood clad masonry building to house elevator; associated interior modifications and refurbishments and site improvements. 1. The Work includes earthwork, storm drainage, paving; concrete work; masonry; steel framing; interior and exterior carpentry including architectural woodwork; insulation, slate roofing and sheet metal work; steel frames, wood doors and windows; installation of door hardware; finishes including veneer plaster, acoustical ceiling panels, resilient flooring, carpeting and painting; louvers; entrance mats; a hydraulic elevator; sprinkler; plumbing; heating;ventilation; and electrical work. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 1. Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator Addition 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work shall be conducted in 3 phases. 1. Phase 1: Site work including new driveway and parking from rear lot to front drive. SUMMARY 01100- 1 Pirone,P.P. 1988. Tree Maintenance. 6`h edition. Oxford University Press,New York- END OF SECTION sir w air wie Page 5 4.10 Topsoil that is to be reinstalled shall be installed to a minimum depth of 6"for lawn areas and 1'0"for all planting areas. 5. Site Storage,Traffic Flow,and Parking_ 5.1 Areas requiring authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden include field office placement,construction parking,soil stockpiling(in consultation with Foreman of Grounds),haul roads,material storage,chemical and fuel storage,and concrete washout areas. No parking will be permitted on lawns or over tree roots unless the areas have been specially prepared for parking. Fines for parking violations are the responsibility of the contractor and will not be passed on to the College for payment or resolution. .� 5.2 In areas of engineered fills,minimum compaction is to be attained if fill is not to support a structure. Storage yard and traffic areas for construction activity is to be well outside drip lines of trees. Protect soil surface from traffic compaction with 8"layer of bark mulch or wood chips. In extremely sensitive areas use double,overlapping, one-half inch plywood sheets with minimum 6"bark mulch or wood chip covering. Following construction,vertical mulch compacted areas. The Director of the Botanic Garden will define areas requiring mulches,plywood and vertical mulching. The Contractor will properly prepare site as directed prior to staging of equipment or materials. The Contractor is responsible for all expenses associated with compacted soils resulting from construction operations. 5.3 Future planting areas outside fence-protected areas that may be subject to construction traffic,material storage -" and equipment parking,should be mulched to a minimum depth of 6",with bark mulch or wood chips. 5.4 Pliers,pilings, and posts: Use posts to hold retaining walls upright,and construct walks,porches and buildings on piers where possible to protect root systems. Care must be taken to minimise root compaction between piers. 5.5 Dumping and disposal of waste(paint,oil,fuel,etc.)is prohibited around all trees and shrubs. All construction debris is to be removed from the site and disposed of properly. No debris is to be buried on site. 5.6 Run-off from building materials,vehicle cleaning,petroleum products,lime,mortar,calcium chloride,etc.,are to be eliminated in areas of tree and shrub root systems. 5.7 No herbicides(soil sterilants,etc)are to be used on the campus without authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden. 6. Inspections: 6.1 Trees and shrubs to remain protected areas,and future planting areas are to be inspected weekly by the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. The Contractor is responsible for immediate correction or any deficiencies and responsibly for all associated costs. 7. Penalties: 7.1 The Contractor shall be held liable for all violations of the aforementioned specifications and standards and shall,when necessary,repair or replace,as appropriate,all plans to be preserved and to correct all other deficiencies .. as determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. REFERENCES Anon. 1986. Manual for Plant Appraisers. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Washington,DC. Anon. 1992. Guide for Plant Appraisal. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Washington,DC. . Harris,Richard W. 1983. Arboriculture: care of trees,shrubs,and vines in the landscape. Prentice-Hall,Inc., Englewood Cliffs,M Page 4 " indicated on boring and test pit data sheets or reasonably anticipated shall be stripped of all such material and fill shall be used to bring such areas to the rough grade level. Sticks,stones,and roots over 2 inches in any dimension shall be removed from topsoil before stockpiling. All other stripped soil which can be classified as fill as defined herein shall be used or stockpiled for re-use in rough grading. The Foreman of Grounds shall define the storage area prior to piling. 3.3 Piles of topsoil shall be located so that the material can be used readily for the finish surface grading but not where root systems of trees and shrubs to be preserved can be compacted by storage piles or equipment. Topsoil shall be protected and maintained during the construction period. 3.4 All unsuitable material as well as logs,stumps,roots,brush,and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of by the Contractor as soon as practicable following the cutting,clearing,or grubbing thereof. 4. Grade Changes and Excavations: 4.1 The Director of the Botanic Garden must approve the location of all utility and irrigation lines prior to bidding and again prior to installation. 4.2 The Contractor shall coordinate utility trench locations with installation contractors. Consolidate utility trenches whenever possible. Excavate trenches by hand in areas with roots larger than 1". Tunnel under plant roots larger than 2"in diameter. 4.3 A trench can be mechanicallv dui toward a tree to its drip line or one-third of the tree's height from the trunk, whichever is greater. The trench should be continued by hand until significantly large roots(determined by Botanic Garden representative)are encountered or a distance indicated by the chart specifications(Toronto specifications- see Harris, 1983)is reached,whichever is less. Tunneling should continue under the central root system to reach the trench at the other side. Depth of the tunnel will vary but should be below the major zone of absorbing roots(to be detennined when digging the trench by hand). 4.4 Excavation should be filled immediately after installation of utility lines,leaving no air pockets. Exposed roots should be covered and kept moist. 4.5 After serious root injury,the contractor shall be responsible for a watering schedule determined in consultation with the Director of the Botanic Garden. 4.6 Where paving is to extend within the drip lines of high value trees to be preserved,or the grade over their root system is to be raised with non load-bearing soil,aeration systems must be installed following consultation with Botanic Garden staff. 4.7 Lowering soil level and excavating for large buildings and basements: in areas where trees are to be preserved and soil level is to be lowered,retaining walls approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden,must be installed, rather than grading. Excavation toward the tree must stop when 2"diameter roots are encountered. Walls are to be no closer than halfway between the drip line and the trunk Keep soil and roots moist and shade soil with mulch. Drainage along foundations should be provided to handle seepage. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed by an arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5. 4.8 If roots are to be cut for a project they should not be cut during bud break or leafing out. If at all possible,roots should be cut in early spring or late summer. 4.9 New drainage patterns created by berms,banks,or grade changes must be approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden and the Foreman of Grounds. ww Page 3 or roots shall be refilled with suitable material compacted to the density,grade,and contour of the surrounding earth. 2 Tree/Shrub Protection: 2.1 Plant materials selected to remain shall be protected by sturdy,temporary barriers erected prior to any construction or excavation work on the site. These barricades shall be maintained in good condition during the entire period of construction work on the site. Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden,use only new and solid lumbar of utility grade or better to construct temporary barricades around plants designated to remain. Barricades shall be 4"x 4"wood comer posts with 3 @ 2"x 4"rails @ 2' 0"intervals to 6'0"height for trees and 2 @ 2"x 4"rails @ 2'0"intervals to 4'0"height for shrubs. Barricades shall be set at the outer drip line for shrubs,unless otherwise authorized by the Director of the Botanic Garden,taking special care not to damage large roots. All barricades/fencing shall be removed when no longer needed as determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. 2.2 Trees to remain shall not be used for crane stays,guys,or other fastenings. Vehicles shall not be parked within the areas inside the drip line of trees or where damage may result to such trees. Do no stockpile fill,equipment,or building supplies with the areas inside the drip line of trees or within 5'of shrubs. 2.3 Damage no plant by burning,by pumping of water,by cutting of live rots or branches,by operating internal combustion engines beneath branches,or by any other means. If,in order to perform excavation work,it becomes necessary to cut roots of plants to be saved,such roots must be neatly cut by Botanic Garden staff or by a professional Arborist who shall be notified in advance of the excavation. 2.4 The Contractor is responsible for all costs of establishing and carrying out a maintenance program for plants to .� be saved throughout the time of construction. The program shall include regular feeding,watering,spraying,and cabling,and pruning of all dead or broken branches. Submit a schedule of the maintenance to the Project Manager at the beginning of the job. Schedule and procedures must be approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden. w 2.5 Pruning shall be done in a manner which does not change the natural appearance of the plant. Broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed with a clean cut. All pruning shall be done by skilled professionals in accordance with specifications and standards set by the International Society of Arboriculture and the National Arborist Association appropriate to the type of plant and to its special or individual requirements. The Contractor shall meet with the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate before commencing the work of pruning. 2.6 Carefully remove branches of any trees to be saved which endanger life or property. Remove dead branches of all trees to be barricaded with the Contract Limit Line,and with the approval of the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate,desirable branches which may interfere with construction or be damaged during construction must be properly tied out of the way where possible,rather than removed. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed by an Arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5. 2.7 Any existing plant scheduled to be protected and preserved,that is injured or destroyed shall be replanted at the Contractor's expense as detailed in Section 1.4. Report all damage promptly to the Director of the Botanic Garden so an Arborist can treat the damaged plants quickly and appropriately. 3..Stripping and Stockpiling Soil: 3.1 Prior to the start of general excavation,strip all topsoil,peat,and organic silt from with-in areas to be occupied by structures,paving,and lawns,as well as other areas to be regarded in this contract, and stockpile. Do no stripping until final approval of work area limit lines detailed in Section 1.2.has been reconfirmed by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate. 3.2 All topsoil,peat and organic silt encountered during the stripping operations,regardless of depth,shall be removed,and stockpiled at the site designated by the Foreman of Grounds of the Physical Plant department. No topsoil is to be removed from the campus without the approval of the Foreman of Grounds. Topsoil shall not be piled over root systems of existing trees and shrubs. Areas having greater depths of topsoil,peat or organic silt than Page 2 "' APPENDIX A: TREE AND SHRUB PRESERVATION SPECIFICATIONS (SMITH COLLEGE) General: Due to the high expense of follow-up care necessary to offset construction damage to trees,shrubs,and soils,and the importance of our tree and shrub collections to the overall quality of life on our campus,it is expected that every effort will be made to eliminate construction damage. 1. Clearing,Grubbing, and Removal: e 1.1. All trees and shrubs,unless noted to remain,shall be cut and removed in their entirety. All stumps,brush, vegetation,rubbish and other perishable or objectionable matter shall be cleared from the site. No on-site burning will be permitted. This debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an approved dumping site in compliance with local codes and the Wetlands Protection Act. 1.2 Prior to starting site clearing operations or any other construction work,stake out all limits of cut and fill,and groups or trees and shrubs to be saved. Promptly upon completion of layout work and before any clearing or other construction work is begun on the site,the Contractor shall arrange a conference on the site with the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate to identify and mark trees and areas of trees and shrubs which are to remain. After the conference,the Contractor shall erect sturdy,temporary fencing along the work area limits,separating it from protected areas. Minimum distances from protected trees shall be to the outer drip lines around each tree or group of trees and shrubs. Sensitive species may require fencing at even greater distances from the main trunk. Do no clearing without a clear understanding of existing conditions to be preserved. 1.3 Limits of clearing shall be those areas defined by the limits of cut and fill. Removal of trees,shrubs,and herbaceous perennials outside those areas shall be done only as noted on the drawings and as approved by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. 4W 1.4 Fell trees in such a way as to not injure trees to be saved. A representative of the Botanic Garden shall designate trees that are to be carefully topped rather than felled. No trees shall be removed until authorized by the Botanic Garden representative. Excavation or grading with the branch spread of trees to be saved shall be performed only under the direction of the Project Manager,with the approval of the Director of the Botanic Garden unless otherwise directed. Existing trees to be saved,which have,in the opinion of the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden,become damaged,shall be replaced with trees of similar size and species. Replacement trees to be tagged in the field or sales yard by the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. Planting specifications for all replacement plantings will be provided by the Director of the Botanic Garden. All expenses incurred shall be paid by the Contractor. If the tree or shrub cannot be replaced because of size or peculiarity of species,the College shall be reimbursed in accordance with the Tree.Evalurtion Formula as w described in"Guide for Plant Appraisal"and"Manual for Plant Appraisers"(latest editions)as published by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. 1.5 Exercise extreme care during grubbing and stripping operations to prevent damage to surface roots of trees to be preserved. Stipping of topsoil around trees to be saved will be restricted to areas designated by the Director of the Botanic Garden. Woody vegetation located near remaining trees is to be cut to ground level and left,or ground below grade(not pulled out),in order to reduce root injury to remaining trees. When lowering grade,scarifying and preparing sub grade for fills and structures within drip lines of trees to be saved,use retaining walls with discontinuous footings to maintain natural grade as far as possible. Excavate finish grade by hand and prune exposed roots in accordance with Section 2.3. Soil beyond cut face can be removed by equipment sitting outside the drip line of the tree. 1.6 Remove stumps and roots to clear depth of not less than 1'0"below subgrade level except in areas where the Director of the Botanic Garden has called for woody growth to be cut to ground level. At lawns only,depth shall be on 6"below finish grade. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps W Page 1 No Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no 35. GOVERNING LAW AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION: This Contract and its terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. The parties irrevocably submit to the jurisdiction of the Superior Court for the County of MW Hampshire over any action or proceeding arising out of this Contract. No .w .m SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 8 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA F. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person, or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance, or use of a motor vehicle. Contractor also agrees that: 1. SC shall be named as additionally insured and sent a copy of the endorsement to each liability and policy upon written request by Smith College; and 2. Contractor shall submit for review by Smith College upon Smith College's request copies of the original insurance policies. 3. Additional insurance requirements are set forth in Exhibit B. 32. DEFAULT: The occurrence of any of the following events shall be deemed a Default by Contractor: (a) Contractor fails to furnish materials, equipment or services required for the project, for any reason not the sole fault of Smith College; or (b) it is determined that any representation made by Contractor herein is untrue; or (c) Contractor attempts to assign its obligations hereunder without Smith College's prior written consent; or (d) a petition in bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor; or (e) a receiver is appointed for Contractor; or (f) an assignment is made for the benefit of Contractor's creditors; or (g) Contractor becomes insolvent. In case of default, in addition to the remedies at law and equity available to Smith College, Contractor agrees to pay to Smith College the amount of all costs, expenses, damages, and reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by Smith College for substituted performance, or for any proceeding, claim, or action. 33. INDEMNIFICATION: Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Smith College and its agents and employees from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, (including, without limitation, attorneys' fees), arising out of or resulting from the performance of the project, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense, (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death or injury to or destruction of property; and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor or anyone directly employed by Contractor. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Smith College, its agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses for claims under workers compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employees benefits, including claims arising because of a failure to provide such benefits; for claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees or the employees of any Subcontractor; claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person other than contractor's employees; claims for damages insured by personal injury liability coverage sustained by any person as a result of an occurrence directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor or by any other person for any reason; claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property including loss to the project itself and loss of use resulting therefrom; and claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damages arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 34. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: Smith College shall not be liable for any incidental, WX special, or consequential damages of any nature whatsoever (even if Smith College has been advised of the possibility of such damages.) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 7 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 23. SUBSTANCE ABUSE: Substance abuse of any kind will not be tolerated and shall be cause for removal from the project or immediate termination of employment. 24. SMOKING: Smoking is prohibited in all occupied Residential, Academic and Administrative buildings. 25. SUPERVISION: Subcontractors are required to employ competent supervisors and field personnel and shall coordinate their work with the work of all other trades. 26. TEMPORARY POWER: The Electrical Contractor/Subcontractor will provide necessary temporary lights & power. The Owner will pay for the cost of power consumed. 27. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: The Contractor will provide portable toilets if necessary for the duration of the construction project. The Contractor will also provide potable water. The Plumbing Contractor/Subcontractor will provide temporary connections to the water service for non-potable water usage. The Owner will pay for the cost of water consumed. 28. TELEPHONE SERVICE: SC will provide the Contractor with telephone and fax lines for use during the project, if required. The Contractor will provide telephone service for their subcontractor's for emergency use only. Any subcontractor requiring telephone service should coordinate with the Contractor for access to telephone lines. 29. HOISTING AND SCAFFOLDING: Subcontractors are to provide their own ladders, scaffolding, staging, and hoisting equipment and all the necessary equipment to accomplish their work. Installation of any staging or scaffolding should be coordinated with the Contractor. 30. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS: Prior to their work each Subcontractor shall submit to the General Contractor for approval a complete list of all Sub-subcontractors and suppliers that the Subcontractor will employ or purchase from. A Subcontractor is responsible for the compliance of its Subcontractor and/or Suppliers to all terms and conditions of the Subcontract. 31. INSURANCE: Contractor shall purchase such insurance as will protect both Smith College and Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the project. A. Claims under workers or workman's compensation disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts, which are applicable to the project. B. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. C. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees. D. Claims for damages that are sustained by a person and caused directly or indirectly by a person employed by the Contractor. E. Claims for damages other than to the work itself because of injury or destruction of property including loss of use resulting therefrom. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 6 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA • Occupational Safety and health act of 1970 as amended • 29CRF01926 OSHA Hazardous Communications Standards • State Department of Labor and Industry Division of Industrial Safety • Insurance Safety Requirements • General Contractor's (Construction Manager's) written safety program • Local safety regulations • SC fluorescent tube disposal program • SC "Hot Work and Confined Space Permit Program" (failure to obtain a "Hot Work Permit" or "Confined Space Permit" will result in a $100.00 fine per incident). • Hard hats and appropriate personal protection equipment shall be worn at all times while in the designated construction area. Failure to comply and the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier shall be directly assigned a $100.00 fine per incident. J. Subcontractors and suppliers shall notify the Contractor of all accidents occurring on the job site to persons or property and shall provide the Contractor with a copy of all accident reports within five days of occurrence. K. In the event of OSHA fines being charged to this project, the offending subcontractor agrees to pay that portion assessed against the Contractor which + ! was directly attributable to the subcontractors' work. 20. CODES: The Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes, including but not limited to the building, fire, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical codes. 21. SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS: The following items are required by all Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers prior to proceeding with any work, or receiving any payments: • List of subcontractors and suppliers • Schedule of values • Progress schedule • List of contractor's, and subcontractor's, personnel, addresses, telephone numbers and copies of licenses (if required). • Copies of all permits and permit applications. • Certificate of insurance with the Owner ("The Trustees of Smith College") and General Contractor indicated as additionally insured. • Performance and payment bonds (if required). • Executed letter of intent, contract or purchase order. 22. KEYS: The College will provide the Contractor with the necessary keys if needed for the project. The Contractor will receive a copy of the key form, signed by the college that states the keys have been returned at the end of the project. Failure to comply with said terms would result in a charge of $250.00 per key. The college reserves the right to deduct this amount from the final invoice. Loss of master keys will result in the re-keying of the entire building at the Contractor's expense. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 5 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA construction the Contractor shall take all measures necessary to prevent damage/dust to adjacent areas not in the Project site. The Work site shall be cleaned each night to a broom clean condition. Materials and tools shall be properly stored in an orderly manner. The Contractor will provide dumpsters. 19. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY: A. Contractor shall establish and enforce safe working procedures at all times during the performance of the project. Contractor shall comply with all local, state, and federal laws and regulations affecting the health and safety of persons and the environment, including, without limitation, those governing the transportation, use, storage, and disposal of hazardous substances and materials. Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Smith College for all damages, settlements, or costs (including reasonable attorney's fees) which Smith College incurs as a result of Contractor's handling or disposal of any hazardous substances or materials. B. If a conflict between two or more codes, rules, regulations, requirements, and/or standards has been identified, the requirement that establishes the highest or more stringent level of protection or safety shall prevail. C. In the event of a conflict between Smith College Physical Plant Health and Safety Guidelines, OSHA, and a policy of the Contractor, the program that establishes the highest level of safety shall prevail. "" D. When necessary because of alteration, construction, demolition, or renovation, the Contractor shall indicate direction of travel to other means of egress if the primary or closest egress is blocked or otherwise hampered. Exit signage shall be adequate in number and size as required by the Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, 6'h edition. E. A barricade, such as a fence or other similar protection, shall be incorporated and installed with the approval of the Smith College Project Manager. The General Contractor shall be recalled (at their expense) to modify, repair, or replace any and all fencing that did not properly protect the construction and demolition site. F. Hazardous equipment, machines, or vehicles shall be adequately protected and secured to prevent unauthorized access or use. G. A Hot Work Permit is required for any and all brazing, cutting, heating, roofing, soldering, and welding that is performed at Smith College. The "hot work" must be performed in accordance with the requirements of OSHA and the Massachusetts Fire Prevention Regulations. The Hot Work Permit must be obtained from the Smith College Physical Plant Environmental Health and Safety Manager before hot work is initiated. The permits can be short or long duration depending on the site and work being executed. H. All Contractors and Subcontractors are obligated to follow all safe work practices as defined by OSHA when working with any suspected lead containing materials. The presence of asbestos, lead or any other hazards not identified should immediately be brought to the attention of Smith College. I. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall issue and enforce the use of all personal protection equipment as required while on-site. The Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier shall comply will all the statutory regulations and requirements including but not limited to the following: .., SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 4 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA 14. PERSONNEL: Contractor agrees to provide as a part of the Project the continuous personal involvement of key members of the Contractor's staff as necessary. Smith College reserves the right to obligate the Contractor to make personnel changes upon request. All Contractors, subcontractors, Suppliers, etc. will be required to obtain a picture badge issued by the college and to be worn at all times while at work at the project site. The Contractor will be responsible for this item. The project site will be partially inhabited during the construction time frame, and any personnel without picture badges will be questioned about their presence, and restricted from the site. 15. VERIFY MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or equipment or doing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charges will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings; the Contractor shall report any differences to the Architect of Record, or Project Manager, whichever is appropriate. 16. INTERRUPTION REQUESTS: All utility (electrical, water, sewer, gas, telephone, hot water, steam, and air conditioning) interruptions are to be made during the Owner's defined "off hours" unless other times are agreed to in writing. The Contractor shall request the Owner's approval a minimum of 72 hours in advance of any utility interruption. There shall be no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor must notify the Electric Department of Smith College and Public Safety Office of any interruption to the fire alarm or the fire sprinkler system. If the fire system is shut down, the Contractor needs arrange a time with the Electric Department of SC to turn the system back on. If there are any problems, any expenses incurred will be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit any requests that differ from the above to the Owner's Project Manager a minimum of 72 hours in advance. Some changes may be possible depending on the circumstances and time of the year. 17. SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL: The City of Northampton charges various rates for disposal. Contact the Department of Board of Health at 413-587-1214. The Owner recycles the materials listed below which are not to be placed in the trash. Any questions concerning recyclable materials can be answered by the Supervisor of Grounds at of Smith College at 413-585-2459. The Contractor shall take care not to contaminate recyclable receptacles with non-recyclable materials. • cardboard • mixed paper • newspapers • glossy paper Smith College will have the first right of refusal for all scrap metal. The Project Manager for the college will make the necessary decision. All salvaged and/or recycled material will be quantified and reported to the Owner. w 18. CLEAN UP AND DUST CONTROL: At the completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the site in a "ready for occupancy" condition to the College. During the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3 ow Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA no 8. HARASSMENT: Harassment of any kind will not be tolerated on this project or on the campus. This includes any inappropriate actions or noises either on the construction site or in the surrounding area. It is strongly recommended that all contractors instruct their employees to limit their contact with college personnel staff or students. Any occurrence of harassment will be cause for immediate termination and possibly removal of subcontractor from the site. The General Contractor will strictly enforce these harassment policies. 9. TRAFFIC CONTROLS: Prior to disrupting traffic flow on a campus/city roadway and to avoid causing a potential hazard to pedestrians or vehicles, the Contractor shall arrange for and pay for security details through the Owner's Campus Public Safety Office. In all cases, the Owner's Campus Public Safety Office shall be the final authority of what activity is a potential hazard to pedestrians or vehicles. 10. OBJECTIONABLE TASKS: As maintained by SC, noise generated by Contractors must be controlled to a maximum level of 80dB. The City of Northampton also has a noise ordinance, which restricts noise before 7 a.m. and after 11:00 p.m. "Noisy" tasks, as defined by the Owner's Project Manager, such as concrete demolition, sawing, or drilling, shall be done during off-hours at no additional cost to the Owner, unless other times are agreed to in writing. Operations producing objectionable odors to occupants/users of the project facility/building, such as floor mastic, painting, etc. shall be performed during off-hours, unless other times are agreed to in writing. 11. WORKERS' PARKING: The Contractor shall provide for the parking arrangement of all workers for the Contractor and Subcontractors. The Owner guarantees no parking on campus property unless specifically stated at the time of bid. The Contractor shall be responsible for enforcing the above parking control. Certain areas are critical to the operations of the Owner and must be available to the users and visitors. Contractor and Subcontractors parking outside designated and approved parking areas will be towed and impounded at their expense. SC reserves the right to deduct outstanding SC parking tickets from Contractor or Subcontractors final payment. 12. LAWNS: The Contractor is responsible to take whatever action is necessary to prevent .�. damage to the lawns, sidewalks, trees and shrubs on the college property. The Owner will review the area with the Contractor before the job starts, to make any notes about the existing conditions. After the project is completed, the Owner, along with the Contractor .R will review the site. If damage has occurred, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace the shrubs, trees, lawns and sidewalks to the satisfaction for the college. 13. COLLEGE OCCUPANCY: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and place equipment in complete areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the project, or the health and safety of the faculty, •• staff, students, visitors, or outside contractors. All subcontractors are to arrange with the Contractor all deliveries and need for storage and office space and coordination of installation of major equipment. The construction workforce is to be restricted to the construction area and the project boundary as determined during a preconstruction meeting. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel September 12, 2001 Smith College an Northampton, MA Smith College Supplementary Conditions MR 1. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTY: Contractor represents that it is a duly organized, validly existing, fully licensed General Contracting firm, and in good standing under the laws of Massachusetts and all other jurisdictions which may pertain. Contractor represents that it is financially solvent and is experienced and fully qualified and competent to perform the project. Contractor hereby warrants that all materials and equipment furnished under this contract will be new, specification grade, free from defects and that the project shall be performed in a professional manner. 2. GUARANTY: Contractor agrees that Contractor shall be responsible for all faulty or defective materials, equipment, and workmanship and that Contractor will promptly remedy all defects and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, for a period of one year from Substantial Completion. In case Contractor fails to remedy such defects within a reasonable amount of time, as defined by Smith College, SC may furnish such materials or complete the project as necessary to bring the project up to the standard required by the project documents. Contractor agrees to reimburse SC fully and promptly for all costs incurred by SC in connection therewith (including reasonable attorney's fees.) 3. PERMITS, FEES, AND LICENSES: Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits necessary for the project to be performed as authorized by SC for completion by the Contractor. Contractor shall not be entitled to reimbursement for any such fees unless otherwise agreed to by SC in writing prior to Contractor's tendering payment for such fees. Contractor shall fully comply with all permits, licenses, conditions, laws, and regulations " affecting the project. 4. TAX EXEMPT STATUS: SC is tax exempt from Federal Excise Tax and Commonwealth of Massachusetts Sales Tax. All prices are to be adjusted to reflect this exemption. Upon request,the tax-exempt number shall be furnished to the contractor. 5. USE OF SITE: Contractor shall confine operations to the site of the project, shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment, and shall keep the project site clean. Contractor will take all reasonable measures necessary to avoid disruption of SC's operations. Any visits to the project site, prior to the commencement of construction, must be scheduled with the Owner a minimum of 24 hours in advance. 6. ACCESS: Contractor shall provide SC access to the project site, wherever located, at all times. SC and its representatives shall have the right at all reasonable times to inspect all of Contractor's books and records which may relate to the project. 7. ACADEMIC ACTIVITIES: The Owner requires that the Contractor schedule operations so as not to interfere with academic activities or religious services, to the extent reasonably possible. A copy of the academic schedule is available to the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1 MW Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA ••d The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 6 is ---------------------------------------- ----------------—-------dollars ($-------—--------------00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 7 is ----------------------------dollars ($------------------------.00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 8 is ------------------------------------------------- -----dollars ($----------------------.00) D. The undersigned agrees that if(s)he is selected as contractor, (s)he will within five days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this bid. The undersigned hereby certifies that(s)he is able to furnish labor that in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work. Date ----------------------------------------------- (printed name of General Bidder) .. Signed: (printed name of person signing and title) Address: ** City:------------------------------------ p Code---------- ________State:________Zi Federal Employees Identification Number: Telephone:---------------------------—FAX: wM FORM FOR GENERAL BID 2 Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA err Name of Bidder: To the Trustees,Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts: A. The Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for HELEN HILLS HILLS CHAPEL ELEVATOR rx Smith College, Northampton,Massachusetts in accordance with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc. for the contract price specified below: B. This bid includes addenda numbered C. The proposed contract price FOR THE BASE BID is -------------------------------------------------------------------dollars ($------------------------00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 1 is ------------------------------------------- ------dollars ------------------- ($ —.00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 2 is dollars ($-----------------------00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 3 is ---------------------------------------- --- dollars ($------------------------00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 4 is dollars ($------------------------00) The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 5 is ------------------------------------------------ ------------dollars ($------------------------00) e FORM FOR GENERAL BID 1 !w Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid Form in the bid envelope. OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION 6.01 DURATION OF OFFER A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty(60)days after the bid closing date. 6.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. taw B. Owner will award the contract and issue notice-to-proceed (or notify of no award)within twenty- one(21) calendar days after the date of bid. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-5 Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts BID SUBMISSION 4.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. B. Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project name and Owner's name on the outside. C. The Owner reserves the right not to share the bid amounts with the bidders. D. Bids amounts shall be rounded to whole dollars. �e 4.02 BID INELIGIBILITY A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the Owner, be declared unacceptable. B. Bids are by invitation, only from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders will be returned. so BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS we 5.01 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices. to B. Attach a list of proposed sub-contractors for each portion of the work not being executed by the General Contractor. so C. Taxes: Owner is a tax-exempt organization, and will supply tax exemption forms and tax- exemption number. 5.02 BID FORM SIGNATURE A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows: 1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal. 2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature. 3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-4 Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Kuhn Riddle Architects. B. Two sets of Bid Documents can be obtained by general contract bidders free of charge upon receipt of a refundable deposit, by certified check or company check in the amount of$100. C. One set of Bid Documents can be obtained by sub-contract bidders or suppliers free of charge, upon receipt of a refundable deposit by certified check or company check, in the amount of$50. P" 1. Documents may be mailed for a non-refundable handling fee of$25 by certified check or company check. D. Deposits will be refunded if Bid Documents are returned complete, undamaged, unmarked and reusable,within 21 days of bid submission. Failure to comply will result in forfeiture of deposit. E. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Bid Documents may be viewed at Smith College Physical Plant Department, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA, and at the office of the Architect. B. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the documents be incomplete. C. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents. 3.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA A. Direct questions to the Architect, telephone (413)259-1630; FAX(413)259-1621. t�+ B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. Addenda will be sent to the F.W. Dodge Plan Room, and to all who received plans from the Architect. Architect will endeavor to distribute addenda completely and in a timely fasion, but accepts no responsibility therefor. Responsibility for obtaining all addenda is exclusively that of the bidders. C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 3 working days before date set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum. . 3.06 SITE EXAMINATION AND PREBID CONFERENCE A. A required Pre-Bid Conference and Site Examination has been arranged for bidders at 1:30PM, on September 27, 2001, at Smith College Physical Plan Department, 126 West St., Northampton, MA. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-3 Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts .A INVITATION 2.01 BID SUBMISSION A. Bid Documents will be available at noon, on September 25, 2001, at the office of the Architect. B. Bids signed, executed, and dated will be received by the Owner located at Smith College Physical Plant Department, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA 01060 before 2:00 pm local standard time on the 10th day of October, 2001. C. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened. D. Offers will be opened privately after the time for receipt of bids. 2.02 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction, including general construction, structural, mechanical, electrical, and site development Work. B. Location: Helen Hills Hills Chapel, Smith College located on the corner of Round Hill Road and North Elm Street, Northampton, Massachusetts. ow 2.03 CONTRACT TIME an A. Timeframe for Owner occupancy and construction are defined in Section 01100, Summary in the Project Manual. BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.01 DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Form . B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda. + » 3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION A. The Contract Documents are identified as the Project Manual and the Drawings. The contents of the Project Manual are delineated in the table of Contents therein. The Drawings are delineated on the cover sheet of the set. 3.03 AVAILABILITY A. Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc. located at 7 North Pleasant Street, Amherst, MA 01002. Deposit checks and handling fees shall be made payable to INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200-2 w Project No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUMMARY 1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. Invitation 1. Bid Submission 2. Intent 3. Work Identified in the Contract Documents 4. Contract Time B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents 1. Definitions 2. Contract Documents Identification 3. Availability 4. Examination --- 5. Inquiries/Addenda 6. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions C. Site Assessment 1. Site Examination 2. Prebid Conference D. Bid Submission 1. Bid Depository 2. Submission Procedure "r E. Bid Enclosures/Requirements 1. Bid Form Requirements F. Offer Acceptance/Rejection 1. Duration of Offer. 2. Acceptance of Offer, 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Bid Form. B. General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions: 1. Tax exempt procedures. C. Section 01100-Summary: Phases and Contract Time INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200- 1 W Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College Northampton, MA go DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS , 06100......... Rough Carpentry.................................................................................................................. 8 06200......... Finish Carpentry................................................................................................................... 6 06401......... Exterior Architectural Woodwork....................................................................................... 5 ■. 06402......... Interior Architectural Woodwork........................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07141......... Cold Fluid-applied Waterproofing...................................................................................... 3 07210......... Building Insulation............................................................................................................... 4 07315.........Slate Shingles........................................................................................................................ 5 07620.........Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim............................................................................................ 7 07920.........Joint Sealants........................................................................................................................ 7 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110.........Steel Doors and Frames....................................................................................................... 5 08211......... Flush Wood Doors............................................................................................................... 5 08212.........Stile and Rail Wood Doors.................................................................................................. 5 08550.........Wood Windows ................................................................................................................... 7 08711......... Door Hardware .................................................................................................................... 11 DIVISION 9-FINISHES ColorSchedule......................................................................................................................................... 2 09215......... Gypsum Veneer Plaster........................................................................................................ 10 '.. 09511.........Acoustical Panel Ceilings..................................................................................................... 6 09651......... Resilient Floor Tile............................................................................................................... 6 09654......... Linoleum Floor Coverings................................................................................................... 4 09680......... Carpet................................................................................................................................... 5 09912......... Painting (Professional Line Products).................................................................................. 14 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10200......... Louvers and Vents................................................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 12484......... Floor Mats and Frames......................................................................................................... 2 DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240......... Hydraulic Elevators.............................................................................................................. 10 DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15300......... Fire Protection...................................................................................................................... 23 15600......... Mechanical............................................................................................................................ 37 .� DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16100......... Electrical............................................................................................................................... 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 NO Proj. No. 01030 Helen Hills Hills Chapel Elevator September 12, 2001 Smith College go Northampton, MA OR TABLE OF CONTENTS lip JDivision.....Section Title..........................................................................................................................Pages DIVISION 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00200......... Instructions to Bidders......................................................................................................... 5 Formfor General Bid............................................................................................................................... 2 AIA A201 General Conditions 1997 Edition......................................................................................... 44 Smith College Supplementary Conditions.............................................................................................. 8 AppendixA............................................................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100.........Summary............................................................................................................................... 3 01140.........Work Restrictions ................................................................................................................ 2 01230.........Alternates.............................................................................................................................. 2 01250......... Contract Modification Procedures...................................................................................... 2 01290......... Payment Procedures............................................................................................................. 4 01310......... Project Management and Coordination.............................................................................. 5 01320......... Construction Progress Documentation...................................................... 01330.........Submittal Procedures........................................................................................................... 9 01400......... Quality Requirements.......................................................................................................... 5 01500.........Temporary Facilities and Controls...................................................................................... 11 01731......... Cutting and Patching........................................................................................................... 4 01770......... Closeout Procedures............................................................................................................. 7 atw DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02230.........Site Clearing......................................................................................................................... 5 02300......... Earthwork............................................................................................................................. 02630......... Storm Drainage..................................................................................................................... 9 02741......... Hot-mix Asphalt Paving........................................................................................................ 8 02751......... Cement Concrete Pavement................................................................................................ 9 02832.........Segmental Retaining Walls.................................................................................................. 5 ws DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03300......... Cast-in-place Concrete.......................................................................................................... 16 DIVISION 4-MASONRY 04810.........Unit Masonry Assemblies.................................................................................................... 11 DIVISION 5-METALS 05310.........Steel Deck.............................................................................................................................. 4 05400......... Cold-formed Metal Framing................................................................................................ 5 05500.........Metal Fabrications................................................................................................................ 8 05511......... Metal Stairs........................................................................................................................... 6 05720.........Ornamental Handrails and Railings.................................................................................... 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 00 in PROJECT MANUAL HELEN HILLS HILLS CHAPEL ELEVATOR SMITH COLLEGE NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS September 12, 2001 Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc. 7 North Pleasant Street Amherst, MA 01002 (413) 259.1630 fax(413) 259.1621 Mechanical and Electrical Engineers Lindgren&Sharples, P.C. 96 Industry Avenue Springfield, MA 01104 (413) 7324336 fax(413) 731.0786 spri mr—i irmpi irr, r. im irrm",-m irms irr"m". irmmr rm7 irrs irms 0 PROJECT MANUAL e HELEN HILLS HILLS CHAPEL ELEVATOR SMITH COLLEGE NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS t September 12, 2001